JP5516171B2 - Bullet ball machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a bullet ball game machine that plays a game by firing a game ball on a game board surface.

In a bullet ball game machine that plays a game by launching a game ball on the game board surface, when the game ball enters the entrance hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is performed with the entrance. In such a lottery, the success / failure is determined based on the success / failure determination value acquired by the computer of the ball game machine, and the symbol display is provided on the symbol display device provided in the ball game machine as the lottery is executed. Be started. Then, after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure. If a game ball enters the entrance during the symbol variation display, the ball is stored as a hold, and after the symbol variation display is over, the hold is digested and a new variation display and lottery Done. By doing so, it is possible to perform a lottery even for the incoming balls generated during the display of the variation of the symbols.

In addition, in order to excite the fun of the game, the ball and ball game machine displays an effect image on an effect display device provided on the game board surface and outputs various sound effects, in addition to the variable display of symbols. Is also done. Such effects include the main control device that controls the progress of the entire game, such as detecting the entrance to the entrance and performing lottery when the entrance is made, and the control of the display contents of the effect display device and the output of sound effects This is realized by cooperating with a sub-control device that performs control related to the above.

JP 2004-81853 A

Here, since the main control device controls the progress of the whole game, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the progress of the game may be hindered when the processing load of the main control device increases.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems of conventional ball game machines, and an object of the present invention is to provide a technique that can reduce the possibility of trouble in the progress of the game.

In order to solve at least a part of the above-described problems, the bullet ball game machine of the present invention employs the following configuration. That is,
A ball game machine in which a game is played by launching a game ball in a game area where a game ball can be entered, and a lottery is performed when the game ball enters the game zone. There,
Numerical value storage means for storing numerical values;
Numerical value updating means for updating the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage means at a constant time period;
When a game ball enters the pitching unit, the determination result acquisition unit that acquires the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage unit as a determination result value for determining whether or not the lottery is successful;
Value acquisition means capable of acquiring different values depending on the acquisition timing;
A symbol display device capable of variably displaying symbols;
When a game ball enters the ball-entry unit in a state where the symbol is not variably displayed on the symbol display device, symbol variation display executing means for executing symbol variation display on the symbol display device;
When a game ball enters the entrance part while the symbol display device is displaying the variation of the symbol, the success / failure determination value is stored as a hold, and the value is acquired by the value acquisition means and the value is set as a hold value. Holding storage means for storing;
When the hold is stored, an effect mode determination process executing means for executing an effect mode determination process for determining an effect mode of the game based on the hold value stored together with the hold,
An effect execution means for acquiring the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination process and executing the effect in the effect mode;
The effect mode determination process execution means pauses the effect mode determination process when the numerical value update period is approaching, and executes the rest of the effect mode determination process after the numerical value is updated. It is a summary.

  It is possible to reduce the possibility that the progress of the game will be hindered.

It is a front view of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which showed the structure of the game board 20 with which the ball ball game machine 10 of the present Example was equipped. It is explanatory drawing which showed a mode that the game ball switches easily and the state where it is hard to enter a ball by driving the electrically-driven accessory 41 to a 2nd operation port. It is explanatory drawing which showed the detailed structure of the segment type display apparatus 70 with which the ball game machine 10 of the present Example was equipped. FIG. 3 is an explanatory view showing a configuration on the back side of the ball game machine 10. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated a mode that the effect image is displayed in the effect display apparatus 30. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a control device of the ball game machine 10. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the configuration of a counter area 141. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which showed notionally the mode that the numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141a was updated, referring the numerical value of the random number initial value counter 141b. It is explanatory drawing which showed the jackpot lottery table referred when performing the success / failure determination of jackpot lottery using the numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141a. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the distribution table referred when determining the type of jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which showed notionally the structure of the pending | holding storage area. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the process of the "main loop process" performed with the bullet ball game machine 10 of a present Example. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the symbol game process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the fluctuation | variation display preparation process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the fluctuation | variation display start process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the fluctuation | variation display start process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the stop mode setting process for jackpots. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the stop mode table. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the stop mode setting process for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the stop mode table for special removal, and the stop mode table for normal removal. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the change display time setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the fluctuation | variation display continuation process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the fluctuation | variation display end process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the game state transfer process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the big entrance opening / closing process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the big entrance opening / closing process. It is explanatory drawing which showed the flow of the condition counter setting process at the time of open | release. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the condition counter setting process at the time of closure. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening / closing mode. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening / closing mode. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the electric accessory control process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the electric accessory control process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the electric accessory opening / closing process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of timer interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the operation | movement entrance ball entering process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the information acquisition process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the through operation entrance ball entering process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the remaining time process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the operation opening ball command setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the operation opening ball command setting process. It is explanatory drawing which showed the holding | maintenance classification table. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the data structure of the operation entrance ball command. 5 is a flowchart showing a flow of command response processing executed by a sub-control device 200. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the action opening ball command response processing. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the pending | holding shift notification command response process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the general command corresponding | compatible process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the general command corresponding | compatible process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the content of the hold display effect of a present Example. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the content of the hold display effect of a present Example. It is explanatory drawing which showed the characteristic of the ball ball game machine of the 1st modification which provided the point where the non-probability change state is more advantageous than the probability change state. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the structure of a latest pending storage area 160. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the information acquisition process of a 2nd modification. It is explanatory drawing which showed the flow of the operation opening ball command setting process of the 2nd modification. It is explanatory drawing which showed the flow of the remaining time process of the 3rd modification which determines whether the operation opening ball command setting process is performed based on the remaining time. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the information acquisition process of the 3rd modification which stores a temporary operation opening ball entering command in a command buffer. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the operation port entrance command response process of the 3rd modification which processes a provisional operation port entrance command. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the operation port entrance command response process of the 3rd modification which processes a provisional operation port entrance command. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the remaining time process of the 4th modification which updates the value of a counter after setting an operation entrance ball command. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the remaining time process which updates a counter after determining whether there exists time to update a counter. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the remaining time process of the 5th modification which performs a through operation | movement entrance ball command setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the through operation entrance ball command setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the jackpot lottery table of the 6th modification from which all the lottery numerical values matched with the jackpot are different in the jackpot table for non-probability change states and the jackpot lottery table for probability change states. It is explanatory drawing which showed the holding | maintenance classification table of the 6th modification by which "non-probability change limited winning holding" was set as a holding | maintenance classification.

Hereinafter, in order to clarify the contents of the present invention described above, examples will be described in the following order.
A. Configuration of the ball game machine:
A-1. Front side configuration:
A-2. Game board configuration:
A-3. Back side configuration:
B. Overview of the game:
C. Control unit configuration:
C-1. Main controller configuration:
C-2. Peripheral device configuration:
D. Main control unit contents:
D-1. Main loop processing:
D-2. Timer interrupt processing:
D-3. Remaining time processing:
E. Control contents of sub-control unit:
F. Hold display effect:
G. Variations:
G-1. First modification:
G-2. Second modification:
G-3. Third modification:
G-4. Fourth modification:
G-5. Fifth modification:
G-6. Sixth modification:

A. Configuration of the ball game machine:
A-1. Front side configuration:
FIG. 1 is a front view of a ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment. As shown in the drawing, the front side of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment is a resin front panel 15 constituting the front surface of the ball game machine 10 or a board surface portion provided at the center of the front panel 15. 12 and an upper plate 13 provided slightly below the front panel 15. A glass plate is fitted into the board surface portion 12 from the back side of the front panel 15, and it is possible to visually recognize the game board installed on the back side of the front panel 15 through the glass plate. In FIG. 1, the detailed configuration of the game board is not shown.

The upper plate 13 is composed of a concave portion formed in a dish shape and a wall surface surrounding the concave portion.
It is possible to hold a game ball inside 3. The upper plate 13 is a ball game machine 10.
It is connected to a launching unit provided in the inside, and it is possible to supply a game ball to the launch unit by throwing a game ball into the upper plate 13. Below the upper plate 13 is a lower plate 16.
By operating a lever provided in the vicinity of the upper plate 13, the upper plate 13
And the lower plate 16 can communicate with each other. As will be described later, since the game balls may be paid out to the upper plate 13 with the game, the game balls may not fit in the upper plate 13, but the lower plate 16 is provided in this way. By making the upper plate 13 and the lower plate 16 communicate with each other, it is possible to discharge to the lower plate 16 the game balls that can no longer fit in the upper plate 13.

At the lower right of the upper plate 13, a launching handle 11 for launching a game ball onto the game board is provided. The launch handle 11 is connected to the launch unit described above, and the game ball can be launched onto the game board by operating the launch handle 11 with the game ball supplied from the upper plate 13 to the launch unit. is there. The firing handle 11 is provided with a sensor 11s (not shown), and it is determined whether or not the player is touching the firing handle 11.
It is possible to detect by s. Then, by controlling the launch from the launch unit in accordance with the detection result of the sensor 11s, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being launched without the player touching the launch handle 11. .

Above the front panel 15, two speakers 14 are provided on the left and right, and it is possible to output effect sounds, melody and other effect sounds in accordance with the game played in the ball game machine 10. These speakers 14 are attached from the back side to the front side of the front panel 15, and it is possible to efficiently deliver the production sound to the player who plays the game toward the front panel 15.

Further, a key portion 17 that can be locked and unlocked using a cylinder lock is provided at the end of the front panel 15 (the right end in FIG. 1). Panel 15
Can be fixed to the main body of the ball game machine 10. Moreover, if the key part 17 is unlocked, the front panel 15 can be separated from the main body of the ball game machine 10, and in this way,
It is possible to access various devices provided on the back surface of the front panel 15 and devices on the main body side. The front panel 15 is pivotally supported by the main body of the ball game machine 10, and the front panel 15 can be separated from the main body by rotating the front panel 15 with respect to the main body of the ball game machine 10. Is possible.

A ball ball machine 4 is provided next to the ball ball game machine 10, and a player of the ball ball game machine 10 lends by inserting a bill or a prepaid card into the ball ball machine 4 when playing the game. You can borrow a game ball from the ball machine 4. A nozzle 52 is provided between the rental ball machine 4 and the upper plate 13, and a game ball lent from the rental ball machine 4 can be thrown into the upper plate 13 through the nozzle 52. As described above, when a game ball is thrown into the upper plate 13, the game ball is supplied to the launch unit. Therefore, the player borrows the game ball from the rental ball machine 4 and operates the launch handle 11 to thereby play the game board. It becomes possible to play a game by launching a game ball to 20.

A-2. Game board configuration:
FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of the game board 20 provided in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment. As described above, such a game board 20 is attached to the board surface portion 12 (see FIG. 1) of the front panel 15 from the back side of the glass plate. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 includes
Rail 2 provided substantially perpendicular to the base plate 29 in the vicinity of the outer edge of the base plate 29 serving as a base
1, and a game area 28 to which a nail 22, a windmill 23, and the like are attached is formed inside the rail 21. The game ball fired by the launch unit is the rail 21
Is led to the game area 28 and flows down in the game area 28 while changing the traveling direction by the nail 22 or the windmill 23. In the game area 28, the through operation port 24 and the operation port 25 are provided.
And entrance holes (entrance entrances) such as the small winning opening 26 are provided, and when the flowing down gaming balls enter these operating openings and small winning entrances, the winning balls are paid out. Or a lottery lottery, which will be described later, is performed.

Among these entrances, the through operation port 24 is a gate-type operation port through which the entered game ball can pass, and the game ball that enters the through operation port 24 is discharged from the game area 28. Without passing through the through operation port 24, the game board 20 continues to flow down. The through operation port 24 is provided with a sensor 24s for detecting a ball entry, and the control device of the ball game machine 10 reads the detection state of the sensor 24s so that the ball enters the through operation port 24. It is possible to grasp that. When there is a ball entering the through operating port 24, the ball game machine 1
The control device of 0 executes various processes such as paying out a prize ball for entering the through operation port 24 to the upper plate 13 or performing lottery upon entering the through operation port 24. The prize ball payout process and the lottery process will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, the small winning opening 26 is a type of winning opening that takes in the game ball that has entered the game ball and discharges it to the back side of the game board 20. This small winning opening 26 is also the above-described through operation opening 2.
4, a sensor 26 s is provided, and the control device reads a detection state of the sensor 26 s to detect a ball entering the small prize opening 26 and obtains a prize ball for the ball entering the small prize opening 26. It is possible to pay out.

In addition, the operation port 25 (the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 2 of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment is used.
5b) is an operating port of a type that discharges the entered game ball to the back side of the game board 20 in the same manner as the small prize opening 26. These operating ports 25 are also equipped with sensors (25as, 25bs),
By reading the detection state of the sensor, it is possible to detect balls entering the first working port 25a and the second working port 25b. An electric accessory 41 is provided in the vicinity of the second operating port 25b. By driving the electric accessory 41, a state in which a game ball can easily enter the second operating port 25b, It is possible to switch to a state where it is difficult to sphere. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game ball is switched between a state where it is easy to enter the second operation port and a state where it is difficult to enter the game by driving the electric accessory 41 provided in the vicinity of the second operation port. It is explanatory drawing. As shown in FIG. 3 (a), the electric accessory 41 is assembled to the operating port unit 40 having the first operating port 25 a provided at the upper portion, and the second 2 working port 2
5b is provided. The electric accessory 41 is connected to a drive mechanism provided in the working port unit 40, and the electric accessory 41 can be driven by the drive mechanism.

FIG. 3B shows a state in which the electric accessory 41 is driven to increase the interval between the electric accessory 41 and the electric accessory 41. As shown in the figure, when the electric combination 41 is driven, the space between the left and right electric combinations 41 is greatly expanded. In this state, the upper surface of the electric accessory 41 is inclined toward the second working port 25b. Therefore, as shown by an arrow in the drawing, the game ball received on the upper surface of the electric accessory 41 Can be guided in the direction of the second working port 25b. In this way, it is possible to realize a state in which a game ball can easily enter the second operating port 25b as compared to a state in which the space between the left and right electric actors 41 is not widely opened (see FIG. 3A). Can do. In addition, if the electric combination 41 is driven and the left and right electric combinations 41 are returned to their original positions (see FIG. 3A), the game ball can be made difficult to enter again. Thus, by driving the electric accessory 41, the second
It is possible to easily switch between a state in which a game ball can easily enter the operation port 25b and a state in which it is difficult to enter.

In the present embodiment, the interval between the electric accessories 41 is widened so that a game ball can easily enter (FIG. 3 (
b)) is referred to as the open state of the electric accessory 41, and the state where the interval between the electric actors 41 is narrow and the game balls are difficult to enter (see FIG. 3A) is the closed state of the electric accessory 41. Shall be called. Here, from the viewpoint of changing the ease of entering the second operating port 25b by driving the electric accessory 41, the closed state of the electric accessory 41 makes it impossible to enter a game ball. It is not always necessary that the second working port 25b is closed, and it is only necessary that the entry is more difficult than the open state of the electric accessory 41.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b, the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment pays out a prize ball or performs a “hit lottery” described later, Various operations are performed according to the result. The award ball payout process performed in response to the entry of such a game ball and various operations performed according to the result of the jackpot lottery will be described in detail later.

A large entrance 60, which is a large entrance, is provided below the operation unit 40 on the game board 20, as shown in FIG. The large entrance 60 has a drive mechanism,
By tilting the plate member provided in front of the opening to the front of the game board 20, from the closed state where the opening is closed and entering is impossible, the opening is opened and the entering is possible. It is possible to switch. In the open state of the large entrance 60, a large number of game balls can easily enter because the opening is wide, so it is difficult for the player to make the large entrance 60 open. It is possible to create an advantageous gaming state. In the bullet ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, “15” prize balls are paid out for entering the large entrance 60.

At the lowermost part of the game area 28, an out port 50 is provided for collecting game balls that have not entered any of the small winning port 26, the operating port 25, the large ball port 60, and the like. The game ball that has entered the out-port is discharged from the game board 20 and collected by a ball collection device provided in the bullet ball game machine 10. In addition, a prize ball is not paid out for a game ball that has reached the out port 50. Since the out port 50 is provided below the other operation ports and the winning ball port, the player can enter any of the operating ports or the winning port before the game ball reaches the out port 50. Play as you wish. This makes it possible to attract the player's consciousness to the game.

A segment type display device 70 capable of displaying a predetermined symbol is provided on the right end of the right side of the game board 20. A plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) are provided in the segment type display device 70, and the symbols can be displayed by causing the LEDs to emit light. In addition, the plurality of LEDs can individually emit light. For this reason, as shown in the following FIG. 4, various characters and numbers can be displayed by appropriately combining the LEDs to emit light. Is possible.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing a detailed configuration of the segment type display device 70 provided in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the segment type display device 70 of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment is composed of a left display unit 72, a central display unit 74, and a right display unit 76.
Each display unit has seven LEDs arranged in the shape of the number “8” (LEDs 72a to 72g in the left display unit 72) and a dot-shaped LED arranged in the lower right. (LED72p in the left display part) is comprised. As described above, these LEDs can be individually turned on or off, and characters or numbers can be expressed by combining LEDs that are turned on or off. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 4B, the number “2” is displayed on the left display unit by turning on the hatched LED of the left display unit 72.

Moreover, not only numbers but also characters can be displayed. For example, in the example of FIG. 4B, the letter “H” of the alphabet is displayed on the central display portion 74, and the letter “L” is displayed on the right display portion 76. By combining LEDs that are turned on or off in this way, it is possible to display letters and numbers. Of course, displayable characters and numbers are not limited to the example of FIG. 4B, and various characters and numbers, and symbols such as “−” can be displayed. Further, in the example of FIG. 4B, numbers are displayed on the left display portion 72 and the center display portion 74 is displayed.
Although the characters are displayed on the right display unit 76, on the contrary, numbers can be displayed on the central display unit 74 and the right display unit 76, and the alphabet is displayed on the left display unit 72. It is also possible to display.

In addition, it is also possible to light each LED of the segment type display device 70 in a combination that does not form letters or numbers. For example, if LED72a and LED72e are turned on,
It is possible to display an aspect that cannot be called a number or a letter. If such a display that cannot be called letters or numbers is performed, it is difficult for the player to immediately understand the meaning of the display. For this reason, the player has the expectation that a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as “big hit gaming state” and “probability change state” described later, has occurred, or an advantageous gaming state has occurred. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by improving the player's feeling of uplift when notifying the player of the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state by avoiding being easily detected by the player. is there.

Each LED of the segment type display device 70 is connected to a main control device 100 which will be described later. The main control device 100 turns on or off each LED of the segment type display device 70, thereby various characters, numbers and symbols. Etc. can be displayed. Also,
By switching the LEDs to be lit one after another, it is possible to display the characters and numbers on the segment type display device 70 while changing them one after another (variable display of symbols). In the ball and ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, such a variation display of the symbol is started when the ball enters the operation port 25 as an opportunity. This point will be described in detail later.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a segment type display device 80 for through is provided below the segment type display device 70. Similarly to the segment display device 70, the through-segment display device 80 includes a plurality of LEDs, and each LED can be individually turned on or off. Moreover, it is also possible to perform a variable display of the symbols by switching the LEDs to be lit one after another. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, such a variation display of the symbols on the through segment type display device 80 is performed in response to the ball entering the through operation port 24. This point will also be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 2, an effect display device 30 including a liquid crystal display device is provided in the center of the game area 28, and various effect images are displayed on the effect display device 30 according to the progress of the game. By displaying, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game of the ball game machine 10. The effect display device 30 is controlled by a display control device 300 provided on the back side of the ball game machine 10, and the ball game machine 10 transmits a predetermined command to the display control device 300 according to the progress of the game. By doing so, it is possible to display various effect images according to the progress of the game.

Above the effect display device 30, an effect accessory 35 is provided. The stage actor 35 is provided with a light source therein and can emit light, and can be rotated by a driving device provided on the back side of the game board 20. And, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game by emitting light while rotating in conjunction with the effect image displayed on the effect display device 30, or by emitting light suddenly or rotating independently of the effect image. It is possible. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, various lamps in addition to the directing action 35 are used for the game board 20 and the front panel 15.
It is possible to increase the game by lighting each lamp as the game progresses. The effect display device 30, the effect actor 35, and various lamps are also controlled by a device group provided on the back side of the ball game machine 10.

A-3. Back side configuration:
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the back side of the ball game machine 10 provided with a device for controlling the game performed on the game board 20 described above. As shown, the ball game machine 10
On the back side, there are various main control devices 100 that control the game, sub-control devices 200 that control various effects accompanying the game, and various liquid crystal display devices of the effect display device 30 according to instructions from the sub-control device 200. A display control device 300 for displaying an image is provided.
The main control device 100 has an electronic circuit on which the MPU 102, the RAM 140, and the ROM 110 are mounted. The MPU 102, the RAM 140, and the like cooperate to control the game. The sub control device 200 is similar to the main control device 100 in the MPU, RAM and R
OM etc. are provided, and these MPU, RAM, etc. cooperate and control the production | presentation accompanying a game. The detailed configuration of the main control device 100, the sub control device 200, and the display control device 300 will be described in detail later.

The main control device 100 and the sub control device 200 are mounted on the back side of the ball game machine 10 in a state of being housed in a transparent plastic case. The plastic case has a structure in which two case members surround the electronic circuit of the main control device 100 from both sides, and the case members are coupled to each other. The plastic case is removed to access the electronic circuit. For this purpose, it is necessary to destroy the joint portion of the case member and the case member itself. In general, gaming machines installed in gaming halls are crafted on gaming machines to operate the gaming machines to pay out prize balls, or misoperate gaming machines to win prize balls illegally, etc. However, if the main control device is covered with the plastic case in this way, when the main control device 100 is crafted, the joint portion of the case member may be broken, It can be found that the work itself has been done by destroying the member itself. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of damage in advance even if an illegal act is received.

On the back side of the ball and ball game machine 10, there is a directing agent driving device 350 for driving the directing agent 35.
In addition, a power supply device 240 for supplying power to each device such as the main control device 100 and the sub control device 200 is also provided. In addition, a game ball tank 400 that receives supply of game balls from an island facility provided in the game hall is provided on the upper part on the back side. The game ball tank 400 is connected to a payout device (not shown) for paying out prize balls, and the game ball tank 40 is driven by driving the payout device by a payout control device 410 (not shown).
It is possible to pay out the game balls in 0 to the upper plate 13 of the ball game machine 10.

In addition, on the back side of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, an external output terminal 9 to which a cable can be connected is provided.
10 is provided. In general, a gaming hall is equipped with a computer (hall computer) for collecting information on each gaming machine installed in the hall. In the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, a cable from such a hall computer is connected to the outside. By connecting to the output terminal 910, it is possible to transmit various types of information related to games played in the ball game machine 10 to the hall computer. For example, a signal indicating that a game ball has been fired from the launch unit, a signal indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the out port 50, a signal indicating that a prize ball has been paid out, or a prize ball that has been paid out It is possible to transmit information indicating the number of By collecting this information, the hall computer can grasp the number of game balls thrown into the bullet ball gaming machine 10 of this embodiment by the player and the number of game balls acquired by the player. Yes, by extension, it becomes possible to grasp the profit status of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment.

The external output terminal 910 outputs a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the through operation port 24 or the operation port 25 described above, or the segment type display device 70 described above (FIG. 4).
It is also possible to output a signal indicating that the variable display of the symbol has started, a signal indicating that the variable display is being performed, or a signal indicating that the variable display has ended. .

As shown in FIG. 5, the ball game machine 10 is an island facility 90 installed in the game hall.
It is connected to the frame plate 902 of 0 via the hinge part 904, and it is possible to access each device on the back side by rotating the ball game machine 10 in the front direction around the hinge part 904. It is.

B. Overview of the game:
In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the progress of the game is controlled using each of the above-described configurations. Before explaining the details of such control, an outline of the game performed in the ball game machine 10 will be described. Keep it.

First, when a player inserts a game ball into the upper plate 13 and operates the firing handle 11, the upper plate 13
The game balls supplied to the launch unit from each other are launched into the game area 28 of the game board 20 one by one. The launch unit is configured such that the speed at which the game ball is fired changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the launch handle 11, and thus the player adjusts the rotation angle of the launch handle 11,
It is possible to aim at the position where the game ball is fired.

The game ball launched into the game area 28 flows down on the board surface of the game board 20 while the traveling direction is changed by the nail 22 or the windmill 23 or the like. At this time, the game ball flows down over time while being blocked by the nail 22 or the windmill 23, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball by following the movement of the game ball, It is possible to enjoy the entertainment of the game by watching the game ball while expecting the game ball to enter the operation opening 25, the small prize opening 26, or the like.

When the game ball flowing down on the board surface of the game board 20 enters the through operation port 24, the variable display of symbols is started on the above-described through-segment display device 80 (see FIG. 2).
Such variable display of symbols is continued until a predetermined time (variable display time) has elapsed since the start of variable display, and when the variable display time has elapsed, the symbols are displayed in a stopped state. When a predetermined winning symbol is displayed during the stop display of the symbol, the winning symbol is won.

In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the through symbol is hit, the electric accessory 41 of the operating port unit 40 described above is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (FIG. 3).
(See (b)). As described above, since the game ball can easily enter the second operation port 25b in the opened state of the electric accessory 41, the player enters the game ball into the second operation port 25b for this predetermined time. It is an advantageous state that is easy to make. If the player is given an advantageous state due to the ball entering the through operation port 24 in this way, the player sets the launch position of the game ball with the aim of entering the game ball into the through operation port 24. Since the movement of the game ball is followed while expecting that the adjusted or launched game ball enters the through operation port 24, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. In this embodiment, when the through symbol is hit, the second operating port 25b is thus formed.
Since the entry into the ball is supported by the electric accessory 41, the winning of the through symbol is referred to as “support winning”.

As described above, in the through-segment display device 80, the symbol variation display continues for a predetermined time. For this reason, another game ball may enter the through operation port 24 while the symbol variation display is being performed. In this case, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball is stored as a hold (holding of the through operation port), and after the symbol change display is finished,
The variable display for the amount that has been put on hold is displayed. Further, the number of holds that can be stored is not limited to one, and a plurality of holds can be stored. In addition, in the ball ball game machine 10 of a present Example, it demonstrates as what can accumulate | store four reservations at maximum.

In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to check the number of holding of the through operation port by a display lamp 82 (see FIG. 2) provided on the game board 20. As shown in FIG. 2, four display lamps 82 are provided below the effect display device 30. Corresponds to the number of holds. For example, when there is no hold, none of the display lamps 82 is lit. When one hold is stored, one of the display lamps 82 is lit, and when two holds are stored, two display lamps 82 are lit. Similarly, in a state where three holds are stored, three display lamps 82 are lit, and four holds are held.
In the stored state, the four display lamps 82 are lit. Also, the ball game machine 1 of this embodiment
At 0, the display lamp 82 is turned on sequentially from the leftmost display lamp 82 as the number of hold increases, and the display lamp 82 is turned off sequentially from the right side as the hold is consumed. This makes it possible for the player to intuitively understand how the on-hold is increased or decreased, and the player can enjoy the game more easily by reducing the labor for grasping the game situation.

A game ball flowing down the game board 20 is moved to the operating port 25 (the first operating port 25a or the second operating port 25).
When the player enters the ball b), the variable display of symbols is started on the segment type display device 70 (see FIG. 4). Similar to the above-described symbol variation display on the through-segment display device 80, the symbol variation display on the segment type display device 70 is continued for a predetermined time, and then the symbol is stopped. Is displayed. At this time, when the symbol is stopped and displayed with a predetermined winning symbol, it becomes a “hit” and the ball game machine 10 shifts to the “hit game state”. In the “hit game state”, the large entrance 60 provided in the game board 20 is opened, and the player easily enters the launched entrance into the large entrance 60 and obtains a large number of prize balls. It becomes possible to do. Thus, since the jackpot gaming state is a very advantageous state for the player, the player usually plays the game aiming at the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state.

Whether or not the symbol of the segment type display device 70 stops at the winning symbol (whether or not the big hit gaming state occurs) is determined by the big hit lottery performed in the main control device 100 of the ball game machine 10. . The jackpot lottery will be described in detail later. Further, when a game ball enters the operation port 25, a series of games from a symbol change display to a stop display is performed, and thus this series of games can be regarded as one unit of the game. For this reason, in this embodiment, a series of games from entering the operation port to displaying a symbol stop will be referred to as “one game round”.

When the big hit game state is started and the large entrance 60 is opened, the large entrance 60 is used until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number of game balls enter the large entrance 60. Will remain open. When the predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls enter the large entrance 60, the large entrance 60 returns to the closed state. The game from the opening to closing of the big entrance 60 is called “round game” or simply “round”. In the jackpot gaming state, such a round is repeated a predetermined number of times, and then the jackpot gaming state is ended.

The large entrance 60 is provided with a sensor 60s, which can detect the entrance of game balls one by one. Therefore, a predetermined number of game balls can be obtained by counting the number of detected game balls. It is possible to detect that has entered the large entrance 60. Here, depending on the position and detection timing of the sensor 60s, even if the large entrance 60 is closed at the timing when a predetermined number of entrances are detected,
At that timing, there may be cases where more than a predetermined number of game balls have already entered. In such a case, the player can win more prize balls than usual. Therefore, if the detection timing of the sensor 60s and the position of the sensor 60s are adjusted so that occasional occurrence of more game balls than the predetermined number occurs in this way (for example, the position of the sensor 60s is determined as the game board). The player is placed a few game balls away from the surface of the game 20), and the player wishes to enter as many game balls as possible, and enters the ball until the big entrance 60 closes. Attention will be paid to the trend of the mouth 60. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract a player's interest more strongly by a round game. The sensor 60 indicates that a predetermined number of game balls have entered.
When the large entrance 60 is closed after detection at s, before the predetermined number of game balls enter the large entrance 6
Since 0 does not close, it is preferable that the player does not have a complaint that the large entrance 60 has been closed even though only a few game balls have entered.

On the other hand, when closing the large entrance 60 after a predetermined time has elapsed, the player tries to enter more game balls into the large entrance 60 before the large entrance 60 closes. The shooting handle 11 is operated to aim at the game ball toward the large entrance 60. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched at a target location. Also,
In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the large entrance 60 is provided inside the game board 20 rather than the windmill 23 (see FIG. 2). , It is easy to enter the large entrance 60. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting the course of the game ball to be directed inward by the windmill 23, and as a result, attracts the player's attention to the windmill 23 and improves the interest of the windmill 23. Can do.

Also, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of “big hit gaming states” with different numbers of rounds and the like can be generated. Transition to gaming state. Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the following description, these various types of jackpot gaming states will be described.

The “2R jackpot gaming state (or simply 2R jackpot)” is a jackpot gaming state in which the above-described round is repeated twice. In this jackpot gaming state, when the round is repeated twice, the jackpot gaming state is terminated, so that the jackpot gaming state can be quickly terminated. In the ball and ball game machine 10, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the game state one after another, but in this way, the game state changes quickly, and thus the interest of the game is effectively enhanced. It is possible. In addition, it is possible to give the player an impression that the game progresses at a good tempo, and to improve the exhilaration of the game.

In the bullet ball gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, it is possible to change the occurrence probability of the jackpot after the jackpot gaming state has occurred. In this embodiment, a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is changed to a high probability (a state in which a jackpot is likely to be won) is referred to as a “probability variation state” or a “probability variation state”, and a state that has not been changed to a high probability is referred to as “non- It shall be called “probability variation state” or “non-probability variation state”. Also, jackpots with a transition to a probabilistic state are called “probable jackpots”, and other jackpots are called “normal jackpots”.

Here, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the “explicit probability variation 2R jackpot gaming state (or simply explicit probability variation 2R jackpot)” and “implicit probability variation 2R jackpot gaming state (or simply explicit probability variation 2R jackpot)”. Two types of 2R jackpot gaming states can be executed. Each of these jackpot game states is a jackpot with a transition to the probability change state while the round is repeated twice, but whether or not the player can easily recognize the transition to the probability change state is different. As will be described in detail later, for example, when an “explicit probability change 2R jackpot gaming state” occurs, the electric accessory 41 (see FIG. 3) has been opened and closed at a low frequency until then. By starting to open and close frequently, the player can recognize that a probability state has occurred. On the other hand, in the “implicit probability change 2R jackpot game state”, such a change does not occur in the operation of the electric player 41, and therefore it is difficult for the player to easily recognize that the probability change state has occurred. It has become. For this reason, in the “implicit probability change 2R jackpot game state”, it is possible to generate a probability change state without noticing the player, and as a result, the player is surprised that the probability change state has occurred. It is possible to increase the interest of the game by giving the player a sense of expectation that the probability change state may have occurred.

The “15R jackpot gaming state (or simply 15R jackpot)” is a jackpot gaming state in which the round described above is repeated 15 times. In this state, the player can play many round games, so that a large number of prize balls can be obtained. For this reason, 1 player
There is a tendency that a 5R jackpot gaming state is desired to be generated. Therefore, by allowing the 15R jackpot gaming state to be generated in the ball game machine 10, the player's expectation for the 15R jackpot is held and the player's interest Can be attracted to the ball game machine 10.

In addition, the 15R jackpot gaming state may have a plurality of modes of 15R jackpot gaming state as in the 2R jackpot gaming state. In the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment,
As such 15R jackpot, “normal 15R jackpot gaming state (or just normal 15R
"R jackpot)" and "Probability 15R jackpot gaming state (or just probability 15R jackpot)"
The two types of jackpot gaming states can be executed. Among these, in the “probability change 15R jackpot”, the jackpot occurrence probability is changed to a high probability at a predetermined timing after the jackpot gaming state occurs (for example, when the jackpot gaming state ends). In this way, "Probability 15
When the “R jackpot” occurs, there is a high probability that the jackpot will be won once again after the jackpot gaming state is over, which is very advantageous for the player. Therefore, by allowing the probability variation 15R jackpot to be generated, the player is expected to be able to acquire a large number of game balls in a short time by generating a plurality of jackpot gaming states in a short period of time, It is possible to attract the player strongly to the game. In addition, when the probability change 15R jackpot actually occurs, the player's feeling of achievement is greatly enhanced, so that it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the “normal 15R jackpot gaming state”, the transition to the probability change state is not performed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, when the 15R big hit gaming state is in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is shifted to the non-probability variation state. In this way, even if the probability variation state advantageous to the player is ended by changing from the probability variation state to the non-probability variation state, it is possible to prevent the player from being greatly disappointed by the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. it can. Thereby, it becomes possible to shift from the probability variation state to the non-probability variation state without greatly impairing the player's interest. Details of the processing for switching between the probability variation state and the non-probability variation state and the details of the processing for executing the various jackpot game states described above will be described in detail later.

As described above, when these jackpot gaming states occur, the large entrance 60 is opened and a game ball can enter, and the manner of opening and closing the large entrance 60 at this time is described above. It may be different depending on the type of jackpot. For example, in the case of an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the large entrance 60 may be opened for a short time (for example, 0.2 seconds). In this way, even if the big entrance 60 is opened and closed, it is difficult for the player to notice that the big entrance 60 has been opened and closed. The risk of recognition can be reduced. Therefore, as described above, if the probability change state is changed after the occurrence of the implicit probability change 2R jackpot, the player can be surely given a surprise that the probability change state has been reached. Alternatively, a plurality of opening / closing modes can be executed for one jackpot type. For example, in the case of a big 15R jackpot, it is determined by lottery whether to execute a round with a short opening time 15 times or a mode in which a round with a longer opening time is repeated 15 times. Also good. In such a case, the player waits for the start of the jackpot gaming state while paying attention to the manner in which the big entrance 60 starts to open and close, so that the player can feel secure about the game by winning the jackpot. Can be avoided.

Also, in the case of the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, similarly to the non-explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the large entrance 60
May be opened only for a short time. Then, in the case of the explicit probability change 2R big hit, after the large entrance 60 performs an opening / closing operation, the electric accessory 41 may transition to a gaming state in which the opening / closing operation is frequently performed. In this way, the occurrence of the probability variation state is not noticed by opening / closing the large entrance 60, but the player can be noticed by the operation of the electric accessory 41. As described above, since the electric accessory 41 may be opened and closed due to the entry into the through operation port 24, the player can remove the electric combination 41 due to the entry into the through operation port 24. It is difficult to immediately identify whether the electric accessory 41 has been opened or closed due to the occurrence of a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have the expectation that the explicit probability change 2R jackpot has occurred, and to attract the player's interest to the electric accessory 41. As a result,
It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the case of a normal 15R jackpot or a probability variation 15R jackpot, the large entrance 60 may be opened over a longer time than the 2R jackpot (for example, about several seconds to 30 seconds). In this way, the player can fully recognize that the big entrance 60 has been opened, and visually recognize that the game ball enters the big entrance 60, so that the uplifting feeling caused by the occurrence of the big hit Can be enjoyed more. In addition, since the state where the game ball enters the large entrance 60 can be visually confirmed, it is possible to further enjoy the game in which the shooting handle 11 is operated so that the game ball enters the large entrance 60. It becomes possible.

In this embodiment, the operation state (game state) in which the large entrance 60 repeatedly opens and closes is referred to as “open / close mode”. Further, the above-described mode in which the large entrance 60 is opened only for a short time is called “low-frequency entry mode” because the game ball is difficult to enter, and the large entrance 60 is longer than the low-frequency entry mode. The above-described mode that opens over time is referred to as “high-frequency entry mode” because game balls are easier to enter than in the low-frequency entry mode.

The operation state (game state) in which the electric accessory 41 repeatedly opens and closes is the second operating port 25b.
Since it is prompting the player to enter the ball, it will be called “support mode”. Further, similarly to the large entrance 60, the electric accessory 41 is less likely to enter the game ball if the time during which the electric accessory 41 is open is shortened. Conversely, the time during which the electric accessory 41 is open. If the length is made longer, it becomes easier for game balls to enter. Therefore, it is possible to change the ease of entering the second operating port 25b by changing the opening time of the electric accessory 41. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of support modes with different opening times of the electric accessory 41 can be executed, and the electric accessory 41 is in an open state among the two types of support modes. The support mode in which the time for maintaining the power (opening time) is shorter than the other support mode is called “low support mode”, and the support mode in which the opening time of the electric accessory 41 is longer than the other support mode is “high support mode” Shall be called. Details of the processing for realizing such a support mode will be described in detail later.

In such a support mode, it is possible to change the ease of entering the second operating port 25b by changing the number of times the electric accessory 41 is released per unit time. For this reason, when a plurality of types of support modes are provided, the number of times of opening / closing the electric accessory 41 per unit time may be varied between the support modes. In the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the number of times of opening / closing the electric accessory 41 per unit time is higher in the high support mode than in the low support mode. It is easier to enter the operation port 25b than in the low support mode. This point will also be described in detail later.

Further, when the support mode is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the type of support mode to be started may be made different according to the type of jackpot. Alternatively, depending on the type of jackpot, the support mode may not be started. In some cases, a jackpot is won during the execution of the support mode. In such a case, the type of the support mode may be changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. By so doing, it is possible to cause a change in the operation mode of the electric accessory 41 due to the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. In the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the case of “normal 15R jackpot”, the case of “probability 15R jackpot” or “
In the case of “Explicit Random 2R Jackpot”, the high support mode shall be started (if these jackpots are won during the low support mode, the support mode will be switched to the high support mode). ”, The high support mode is not started (if the non-explicit probability variable 2R jackpot is won during the low support mode, the low support mode is continued without switching the support mode to the high support mode). . Details of the processing for controlling the support mode will be described later in detail.

As described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the operation port 25, the segment type display device 70 performs the change display and stop display of the symbol, and the symbol is a predetermined hit symbol. If it is stopped and displayed, it shifts to the jackpot gaming state. At the time of the variable display and stop display of the symbols, various images and symbols are displayed not only on the segment type display device 70 but also on the liquid crystal display device of the effect display device 30.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory view illustrating a state in which the effect image is displayed on the effect display device 30. As shown in FIG. 6 (a), in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the character design 32 with numbers is displayed on the effect display device 30. The character symbol 32 is divided into three stages in the vertical direction of the effect display device 30 (refer to the respective stages indicated as “upper stage”, “middle stage”, and “lower stage” in the figure) and are arranged in a row in each stage. A sub-symbol 34 is drawn between the character symbol 32 and the character symbol 32 at each stage. When the variable display of symbols is performed on the segment type display device 70, the character symbols 32 and the sub symbols 34 at each stage move in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 30 while maintaining the state of being arranged in a horizontal row. The state is displayed.

As described above, in the segment type display device 70, when a predetermined variation time has elapsed after the symbol variation display is started, the symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, also in the effect display device 30, the character symbol 32 and the sub symbol 34 that have moved in the horizontal direction are stopped, and the character symbol 32 and the sub symbol 34 are stopped and displayed. Here, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the character symbol 32 and the sub symbol 34 is changed to the segment type display device 70.
It is possible to correspond to the pattern stop display mode at. For example, when a symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the segment type display device 70, the character display 32 with the same number is arranged in a line in the effect display device 30 in correspondence with this. Is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 6B illustrates a state in which the character symbols 32 with the same numerals are stopped and displayed in a line in the vertical direction. As shown in the figure, the character symbol 32 with the numeral “3” is displayed side by side on the line indicated as “L1” in the figure. If the character symbols 32 with the same numbers are displayed side by side in this way, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that a jackpot has occurred.

Further, when the character symbol 32 is stopped and displayed, the upper, middle, and lower stages may be stopped simultaneously, but the respective stages may be stopped at different timings. For example, the upper and lower stages are stopped and displayed first, and the middle stage is finally stopped and displayed. At this time, if the same character design 32 is stopped in a row in the upper row and the lower row, the player is expected that the same character design 32 stops in the middle row and a jackpot state is generated. It is possible to increase the interest of the game. In the present embodiment, the display mode in which the symbols of the two stages are aligned and stopped and displayed in this way is called reach display, and the effect using the reach display is called reach effect.

Further, in FIG. 6B, an example in which the same character design 32 is arranged on the line indicated as “L1” is illustrated, but the manner in which the character design 32 is arranged in a line is not limited to this mode, and various modes are available. Is possible. That is, in the effect display device 30 of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, FIG.
The same character symbol 32 can be stopped and displayed side by side on any one of the five lines “L1” to “L5” shown in b). In this way, if it is aligned on any of a plurality of lines, if it corresponds to the occurrence of jackpot gaming state,
Since the player can have the expectation that the same symbol will be lined up on any one of the many lines, it is possible to further improve the player's expectation and enhance the interest of the game. is there.

Further, when the character symbol 32 is stopped and displayed, the character symbol 32 may be stopped and displayed in a different manner depending on the type of jackpot. For example, in a jackpot (probability jackpot) that shifts to a probability change state such as a probability change 15R jackpot, the character symbols 32 to which odd numbers such as “1” and “3” are attached are stopped and displayed in a line, and a normal 15R jackpot etc. In the jackpot that shifts to the non-probable change state, the character symbols 32 with even numbers such as “2” and “4” may be displayed in a line and stopped. In this way, the player can be made to recognize by the effect display device 30 that the jackpot is to shift to the probability change state or the jackpot to be changed to the non-probability change state.

On the contrary, in the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the character symbols 32 may not be aligned in a line. In this way, the player displays that the jackpot has been generated by the effect display device 3.
By avoiding the possibility of being known by 0, it is possible to more surely give a surprise that a big hit gaming state has occurred before and a surprise that it has shifted to a probable state soon.

The effect display device 30 is provided near the center of the game board 20 and is large in size, so that it is easily caught by the player. For this reason, it is normal for a player to play a game while looking at the effect display device 30. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce an effect by using the effect display device 30. In addition, since the effect display device 30 has a large area and can display a fine image by increasing the number of pixels of the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to display a high-quality image. If such a high-quality image is displayed, the effect of the production can be further enhanced.

Further, when a game ball enters the operation port 25, not only the effect display on the effect display device 30 and the variable display of the symbols on the segment type display device 70, but also a prize ball may be paid out. In this way, when the game ball enters the operation port 25, not only does the change display of the symbol start and the possibility of shifting to the big hit state occurs, but the player can also obtain a prize ball, so the player can operate the operation port 2
The game will be played with a strong desire to enter 5th. For this reason, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether or not a game ball enters the operation port 25, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the player can play the game for as long as the awarded ball, the player can be attracted to the game for a longer time. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, “3” prize balls are paid out for entering the first operating port 25a.
It is assumed that “4” prize balls are paid out for entering the second operating port 25b. The details of the process for paying out such prize balls will also be described in detail later.

When a game ball enters the operating port 25 while the effect display device 30 or the segment type display device 70 displays the variation of the symbol, the game ball enters as in the case of the through operation port 24. Is stored as hold (holding of the operating port), and after the variable display of the symbol is finished, the variable display for the hold is performed. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of the first operating port 25a can be confirmed by the display lamp 83a (see FIG. 2) provided on the game board 20, and similarly,
It is possible to confirm the number of reserved second operating ports 25b by the display lamp 83b. As shown in FIG. 2, four display lamps 83a and four display lamps 83b are provided, and the number of the display lamps that are lit corresponds to the number of holdings of the respective operation ports. doing. That is, when there is no hold, all the display lamps are turned off, and when there is one hold, one of the display lamps is turned on. Similarly, when there are two holds, two display lamps are lit, three display lamps are present when three holds are present, and four display lamps are present when four holds are present, Each is lit.

In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display lamps are lit in order from the leftmost display lamp as the number of holds increases, and the display lamps are sequentially displayed from the right as the hold is consumed. Turns off. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily understand how the hold increases or decreases. Since the number of lottery wins increases as the number of holds increases, players tend to desire a state with a large number of holds, so it is easy to see how the number of holds increases and decreases in this way, It is possible to make the game more enjoyable to the player with the increase and decrease of the game.

In addition, in the bullet ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is also possible to display such a reserved number on the effect display device 30. That is, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), by displaying the design symbol in a part of the effect display device 30 (the first working port holding display area and the second working port holding display area), The number of holds can be displayed using the effect display device 30. Here, the “first operation port hold display area” in the figure is an area for displaying the number of hold of the first operation port 25a, and as shown, the first area a1 and the second area a2. , A third area a3, and a fourth area a4. And the 1st operation port 25
By displaying the same number of design symbols as the number of holdings a in order from the left of the display area, the number of holdings of the first working port 25a can be displayed.

For example, if the number of reserves of the first operating port 25a is “2”, the design symbol is displayed in two areas (first area a1 and second area a2) from the left of the first operating port holding display area correspondingly. Is displayed, it is possible to display that the number of reservations of the first operating port 25a is “2”. Similarly for the second working port hold display area, the first area b1, the second area b2, the third area b
3. It consists of four display areas of the 4th area b4, and displays the number of reservations of the 2nd operation mouth 25b by displaying in the display area the design symbol of the number corresponding to the number of reservation of the 2nd operation mouth. Is possible. Note that such processing for displaying the number of holds on the effect display device 30 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 is also provided with a small prize opening 26. When a game ball enters the small winning opening 26, the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the upper plate 13 as a prize ball. In this way, if the winning ball is paid out along with entering the small winning opening 26, even if the big winning lottery is not performed at the time of entering the small winning opening 26, the player can play the gaming ball into the small winning opening 26. There is a tendency to play games while expecting to enter. Therefore, by providing the small winning opening 26, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the game and increase the interest of the game without increasing the number of jackpot lotteries.

If the small prize opening 26 is provided below the game board 20 with respect to the operation opening 25, the operation opening 2
Even if the game ball does not enter 5, there is a possibility of entering the small prize opening 26, so that the player's interest is distracted by the game ball not entering the operation port 25. It can be avoided. This makes it possible to attract the player more strongly to the game.

On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter any of the entrances such as the through operation port 24 and the operation port 25, the game ball is collected at the out port 50 provided at the lower part of the game board 20. Game board 2
It is discharged out of zero. In this case, the player cannot obtain a prize ball. As described above, in the ball game machine 10, a player launches a game ball and the operation opening 25 or the small prize opening 26 on the game board 20.
A game to enter the game is performed, and as the game progresses, the prize ball is paid out or the game progresses while various effects are performed. Below, the detailed structure of the control apparatus which controls this game is demonstrated.

C. Control unit configuration:
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control device of the ball game machine 10. As shown in the figure, the control device for the gaming machine includes a main control device 100, a sub control device 200, a display control device 300, and the like. The main control device 100 mainly plays a role of controlling the progress of the game, such as performing the above-mentioned jackpot lottery or shifting to the jackpot gaming state according to the result of the jackpot lottery. Further, the sub-control device 200 and the payout control device 410
By transmitting commands for instructing various operations to these devices, these devices are caused to execute various operations. In FIG. 7, the direction in which data and signals are input and output is indicated by black arrows.

C-1. Main control unit configuration:
The main control device 100 includes a one-chip type MPU 102 on which an arithmetic device 104, a ROM 110, a RAM 140, and the like are mounted. Inside the chip of the MPU 102, the arithmetic unit 104, the ROM 110, and the RAM 140 are mutually connected by a bus, and data can be transmitted and received between them. The MPU 102 uses such a bus connection to
A program can be read from the OM 110 and various instructions described in the read program can be executed in the arithmetic unit 104. In addition, arithmetic operations such as addition and subtraction can be performed using the arithmetic unit 104. The MPU 102 also stores a program register that temporarily stores the read program, a program counter that stores an address of an instruction being executed in the arithmetic device 104 (an address in the program), and an arithmetic operation performed by the arithmetic device 104. A working register or the like for storing various data to be used is also provided, and a program can be appropriately executed using these configurations.

Further, the MPU 102 has a timer interrupt function for generating an interrupt at a constant time interval for a program being executed. When an interrupt is generated by the timer interrupt function, the MPU 102 interrupts execution of the program and stores the value of the program counter in the stack memory in the MPU 102. Also, the value of each register such as a working register is also stored in the memory in the MPU 102. Then, the start address of the program to be executed by interruption is acquired from the program register of the MPU 102 and the program is executed. When the interrupted and executed program ends, the value of the program register stored in the stack memory in the MPU 102 is read and the MPU 102
The value of each register stored in the internal memory is returned to each register. And by starting execution of the original program from the address stored in the program register,
It is possible to resume the original program from the rest. In the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment,
Using such a timer interrupt function, processing for detecting a ball entering the through port 24, processing for detecting a ball entering the port 25, and the like are executed. This point will be described in detail later.

The ROM 110 is provided with a plurality of storage areas capable of storing various types of data. Among these, the program area 111 stores a program executed by the MPU 102. Various data necessary for program execution, such as the program start address, are also stored in the program area 111. The MPU 102 reads the programs and data from the program area 111 of the ROM 110 and executes the programs to control the ball game machine 10.

In the lottery table area 112 of the ROM 110, a “big hit lottery table” that is referred to when the main control device 100 performs a big hit lottery is stored. In the jackpot lottery table of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, each numerical value from “0” to “599”,
The success / failure result of the jackpot lottery for each numerical value is associated, and by acquiring any numerical value from “0” to “599” and referring to the jackpot lottery table, the success / failure of the jackpot lottery for the acquired numerical value is determined. It is possible to determine. A detailed configuration of such a jackpot lottery table and a method of acquiring numerical values used for the lottery will be described in detail later.

The distribution table area 113 stores a “distribution table” that is referred to when a big hit occurs. As described above, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to generate a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, such as an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot and a normal 15R jackpot. For this reason, when a big hit occurs, by referring to the sorting table,
Which jackpot gaming state of these jackpot gaming states is to be executed is determined.
Details of the distribution table and processing for determining the jackpot gaming state to be executed with reference to the distribution table will be described later in detail.

The stop mode table area 114 stores a “stop mode table” that is referred to when the symbols are stopped and displayed on the segment type display device 70. In the stop mode table,
Whether or not each LED of the segment type display device 70 is turned on is determined for each LED, and a predetermined stop pattern is displayed on the segment type display device 70 by turning on or off each LED according to the stop mode table. Is possible. The detailed configuration of the stop mode table and details of the process of displaying the stop symbol with reference to the stop mode table will be described later.

The variable display time table area 115 stores a “variable display time table” in which a time (variable display time) for displaying symbols in the segment type display device 70 is set. In this variation display time table, a plurality of variation display times having different lengths are set with numbers for identifying the variation times. When performing variable display of symbols, after determining the number of the variable display time, the variable display time of the symbol is determined by referring to the variable display time table and reading the variable display time corresponding to the number. . Details of the process of performing the symbol display will be described later.

The command information storage area 116 stores various commands that the main control device 100 transmits to the sub control device 200, the payout control device 410, and the like. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, these commands are binary data having a predetermined data length (number of bytes), and can therefore be stored on the ROM 110. ROM1 like this
If the main control device 100 transmits a command to the sub control device 200, the payout control device 410, etc., the stored command is read out and the sub control device 200 or the payout is sent out. What is necessary is just to transmit to the control apparatus 410. In this way, it is not necessary to generate a new command every time a command is transmitted, so that the command can be transmitted quickly. Details of various commands and details of processing in which the main control device 100 transmits commands will be described in detail later.

The above-described classification of each storage area of the ROM 110 is classified by focusing on the contents to be stored, and it is not always necessary that these storage areas are actually divided on the ROM 110. Of course, it is also possible to actually configure the ROM 110 separately. For example, in the address space of the ROM 110, the addresses may be divided for each storage area, or each storage area may be assigned to a different bank using a so-called bank structure. If each storage area is actually divided and configured on the ROM 110 in this way, the data stored in each storage area is collected in the ROM 11.
Since it is stored in 0, it becomes possible to read data from each storage area more quickly.

The RAM 140 of the main control device 100 is a random access memory capable of temporarily storing various data used for the progress of the game. RAM140 is also ROM
110 is connected to the arithmetic device 104 by a bus, and the MPU 102 is connected to the arithmetic device 104.
Is stored in the RAM 140 or the data in the RAM 140 is read out to obtain the arithmetic unit 10.
4 can be transferred. Also, the data is read from the ROM 110 and the RAM
It is also possible to store the data of the ROM 110 in the RAM 140 by writing the data to 0. Further, since the RAM 140 and the ROM 110 are connected by a bus, R
When storing the data of the OM 110 in the RAM 140, it is possible to directly write the data of the ROM 110 into the RAM 140 without using the arithmetic unit 104. In this way, ROM1
10 data can be written to the RAM 140 more quickly, and the ROM 11
It is possible to reduce the processing load on the arithmetic unit 104 when writing 0 data to the RAM 140.

Although not shown in FIG. 7, the main control device 100 is also provided with a backup device. This backup device is connected to the main control device 100 from the power supply device 240.
When the voltage falls below a predetermined voltage, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and a power failure notification signal is transmitted to the main control device 100. When the main controller 100 receives the power failure notification signal, the main controller 100 performs a power failure process such as closing the large entrance 60, and MP.
The operation of U102 is stopped. At this time, a backup voltage is supplied to the RAM 140 from a backup capacitor. By doing so, the data stored in the RAM 140 can be held as it is even during a power failure. The backup capacitor has a large capacitance, and the RAM 140 does not require so much power as long as it only maintains the storage state. Thus, by supplying the voltage from the backup capacitor, the RAM 140 It is possible to keep the memory state for a long time. As a result, when recovering from a power failure, the operation can be resumed with the storage state of the RAM 140 restored to the original state.

The RAM 140 focuses on the contents of the data to be stored and the functions realized by the stored data, as shown in FIG. It can be understood that the electric accessory holding area 144, the command buffer 145, and the general-purpose area 146) are provided. The details of the processing using these storage areas will be described later, but each storage area will be briefly described for easy understanding.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the configuration of the counter area 141. As shown in the figure, the counter area 141 includes a “big hit random number counter 141a”, a “random number initial value counter 141b”, a “big hit type counter 141c”, a “variable type counter 141d”, a “reach random number counter 141e”, and an “electrical accessory release counter”. 141f "and" round remaining number counter 141g "are provided. Each counter is independent, and the value of each counter can be changed individually. Also, as shown,
In the counter area 141, a buffer is provided for each counter, and the numerical value of each counter can be stored in the buffer as indicated by a black arrow in the figure. In this way, it is possible to read data from the buffer instead of reading data from the counter when referring to the value of each counter. Even at the timing when data cannot be read out, the numerical value of the counter can be acquired. In this embodiment, the counters are collectively referred to as a “counter group”, and the buffers corresponding to the counters are collectively referred to as a “buffer group”.

The “big hit random number counter 141a” is a counter that holds numerical values used in the big hit lottery. Although the details of the jackpot lottery will be described later, whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful is determined by comparing the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a with the jackpot lottery table. Also, the numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141 a is repeatedly added at predetermined time intervals by “1” by the control process executed by the main control device 100 (
Count up). Such processing performed by the main controller 100 will also be described in detail later.

When the counter value reaches the maximum value, the jackpot random number counter 141a is “0”.
Is configured to return. For this reason, a so-called loop counter is configured that repeatedly indicates a value between “0” and the maximum value (“599” in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment). When such a loop counter is used, any value from the minimum value of the counter (“0” in the jackpot random number counter 141a of the present embodiment) to the maximum value (“599” in the jackpot random number counter 141a of the present embodiment) Can be obtained, and a different value can be obtained depending on the timing of reading the value of the counter, so the value is obtained from the counter at random timing (for example, when the game ball enters the operation port 25). Then, it is possible to acquire a random numerical value (so-called random number).

Further, if the time interval for adding “1” to the counter value is made equal (for example, every 4 msec), the minimum value of the counter (“0” in the jackpot random number counter 141a of this embodiment) is increased from the maximum. For any numerical value up to the value (“599” in the jackpot random number counter 141a of the present embodiment), the probability that the counter indicates that numerical value is equal, so for any numerical value from the minimum value to the maximum value, The probability that the number is acquired is equal (equal among all numbers). This makes it possible to obtain a uniform random number from the counter. The jackpot random number counter 141a of the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment is
A counter capable of obtaining such a uniform random number is constructed.

Further, when a random number is acquired using such a loop counter, the counter value is periodically repeated if the counter value is simply looped. Therefore, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot random number counter 141a and the “random number initial value counter 1”
41b "is used in combination to reduce the periodicity of the jackpot random number counter 141a and obtain more uniform random numbers.

The “random number initial value counter 141b” is a loop counter that takes a numerical value range (in this embodiment, from a minimum value “0” to a maximum value “599”) that is equal to the numerical value range of the jackpot random number counter 141a. Similarly to the big hit random number counter 141a, the random number initial value counter 141b is updated by a control process performed by the main control device 100. Here, in the jackpot random number counter 141a, the numerical value of the counter is incremented by “1” every fixed time period (for example, every 4 msec), but in the random number initial value counter 141b, the numerical value is updated for reasons described later. The time period is not completely uniform. For this reason, the random number initial value counter 141b has lower numerical periodicity than the big hit random number counter 141a. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, using the random number initial value counter 141b,
The numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is updated as follows.

FIG. 9 shows the jackpot random number counter 14 while referring to the numerical value of the random number initial value counter 141b.
It is explanatory drawing which showed notionally the mode that the numerical value of 1a was updated. In the drawing, the numerical values of the random number initial value counter 141b and the big hit random number counter 141a are shown. Numerical values up to “599” can be taken.

When updating the jackpot random number counter 141a, first, the random number initial value counter 141b
, The first numerical value (random number initial value) to start counting up is determined. For example,
When the numerical value of the random number initial value counter 141b is “0” (see the numerical value surrounded by the broken line among the values of the “random number initial value counter” in the drawing), the count-up of the jackpot random number counter 141a is increased from “0”. It is determined to start (see the numerical value surrounded by a broken line among the numerical values of the “big hit random number counter” in the figure). Then, from the determined random number initial value, the numerical value is periodically “1”.
"Is counted up (see the black arrow in the figure). When the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a reaches the maximum value, as described above, the jackpot random number counter 141a.
Is returned to the minimum value (“0” in the example of FIG. 9).

Here, while the jackpot random number counter 141a is counted up, the numerical value of the random number initial value counter 141b is also updated. The jackpot random number counter and the random number initial value counter are updated in this way, and when the jackpot random number counter 141a returns to the random number initial value that started counting up ("0" in the example of FIG. 9), refer to the random number initial value counter again. To determine the initial random number. For example, as indicated by a chain line in FIG. 9, if the numerical value of the random number initial value counter is “597”, the random number initial value is set to “597”. This time, from this new random number initial value, the number is counted up until the numerical value returns to the random number initial value “597”. When the counter value has reached one cycle (all the numerical values of the counter are from “597” to “596”). When the numerical value is taken), the random number initial value is determined again with reference to the random number initial value counter 141b again.

In this way, when the numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141a makes a round, the random number initial value is obtained by referring to the random number initial value counter, and if the numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is counted up again from the random number initial value, the jackpot random number counter In 141a, since the count-up is started from a different initial value every time the numerical value makes a round, the jackpot random number counter 141a
It is possible to avoid the situation where the numerical value of has periodicity. Thereby, the ball game machine 1 of the present embodiment
At 0, it is possible to obtain a more uniform random number from the jackpot random number counter 141a.

9, the random number initial value counter 141b and the big hit random number counter 141a are updated by “main loop processing” and “timer interrupt processing” executed by the main control device 100. Is done. These processes will be described in detail later.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot lottery table that is referred to when determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful. FIG. 10A shows a jackpot lottery table for an uncertain change state, and FIG. 10B shows a jackpot lottery table for a probability change state. As shown in the drawing, in the jackpot lottery table, a lottery result of “big hit”, “normally missed”, or “specially missed” is associated with a numerical value (lottery value) used for the lottery. As described above, such a jackpot lottery table is stored in the ROM 110 of the main control device 100.
Are stored in the lottery table area 112.

When determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful, the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is read to acquire the lottery value, and the lottery result corresponding to the acquired lottery value is read by referring to the jackpot lottery table. It is determined whether it is a big hit, “ordinary loss” or “special loss”. At this time, if the ball game machine 10 is in a probable change state, the jackpot lottery table for the probability change state (see FIG. 10B) is referred to. (See FIG. 10A).

For example, if the lottery value acquired from the jackpot random number counter 141a is “7” in the non-probability changing state, the lottery result corresponding to the lottery value “7” is acquired with reference to the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability changing state. In the jackpot lottery table for the uncertain change state illustrated in FIG. 10A, the lottery result corresponding to the lottery value “7” is “big jackpot”.

As shown in FIG. 10A, in the jackpot lottery table for the uncertain change state of the present embodiment, two lottery values “7” and “307” are associated with the jackpot. On the other hand, in the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state, as shown in FIG. 10B, more lottery values are associated with the jackpot than the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability variation state. For this reason, when determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful with reference to the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state, the jackpot is determined with a higher probability than when determining whether or not the jackpot lottery table for the non-probable variation state is determined. You will win. In this way, by preparing a plurality of jackpot lottery tables with different numbers of lottery numbers associated with jackpots and switching the referenced jackpot lottery table, it is possible to easily switch the probability of winning the jackpot. . In the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the case of the probability variation state, the lottery numerical value is referred to the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state in which the lottery value is associated with the jackpot. By referring to the jackpot lottery table for the non-probable change state where the number of associated lottery numbers is smaller than the jackpot lottery table for the probability change state, the probability change state in which the jackpot is generated with high probability, and the jackpot than the probability change state It is possible to realize an uncertain change state with a low occurrence probability.

When the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state and the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability variation state are provided as described above, the lottery value associated with the jackpot in the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability variation state is determined for the probability variation state. The jackpot lottery table may be associated with the jackpot. For example, in the example of FIG. 10, in the jackpot lottery table for the uncertain change state (see FIG. 10A), two lottery values “7” and “307” are associated with “jackpot”. These two lottery numerical values are also associated with “hit” in the jackpot lottery table for probability variation state (see FIG. 10B). In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in this way, by sharing a part of the lottery value corresponding to the jackpot in the jackpot lottery table for the non-probable change state and the jackpot lottery table for the probability change state, The effect of “hold display effect” described later is improved. This point will be described in detail later.

If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot, the ball game machine 1 of this embodiment will be missed.
At 0, two types of “out of normal” and “out of special” are set in the jackpot lottery table. In this way, by setting a plurality of types of losing in the jackpot lottery table and causing the gaming machine to operate differently depending on the type of losing, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is losing, a change occurs in the game. This makes it possible to enhance the fun of gaming. For example, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is “special out”, the open / close mode (the mode in which the large entrance 60 is repeatedly opened and closed) is set to the low frequency entrance mode. (A mode in which the large entrance 60 is opened only for a short time). As described above, in the bullet ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, the large entrance 60 opens and closes in the low-frequency entry mode even when an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot occurs, so it is great even in the case of a special departure. If the entrance 60 is opened and closed in the low-frequency entry mode, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot has occurred or whether a special miss has occurred. In the case of the unspecified probability 2R jackpot, the game changes to the probability change state and becomes a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the large entrance 60 is opened and closed in the low frequency entry mode, the player We have the expectation that a big hit has occurred. This makes it possible for the player to have the expectation that the state has shifted to the probability variation state even though the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot has not occurred.

In general, if the jackpot does not occur, the player tends to gradually lose interest in the game, but it is actually difficult to generate the jackpot frequently. there,
In this way, if a special outage is provided, and the operation of the large entrance 60 when a special outage occurs is the same as (or similar to) the operation at the time of the big hit, the big hit is actually made. Even if it is not generated, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest to the game.

Further, not only the operation of the large entrance 60 but also the operation of the electric accessory 41 may be made the same or similar. For example, in the case of “special loss”, the electric accessory 41 is operated in the low support mode. As described above, in the bullet ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the implicit probability variable 2R jackpot occurs during the support mode, the support mode is not changed, so that the implicit probability variable 2R jackpot occurs during the low support mode. Then, after the opening / closing operation of the large entrance 60 is completed, the electric accessory 41 operates in the low support mode. Therefore, if the low support mode is started when a special loss occurs, the operation of the electric accessory 41 can be made to coincide with the case where the uncertain probability variation 2R jackpot occurs. This makes it possible for the player to have a stronger expectation that an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot has occurred.

Note that details of the processing for determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful and details of processing for performing various operations in accordance with the results of the success or failure determination will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 8, the counter area 141 is provided with a jackpot type counter 141c in addition to the jackpot random number counter 141a and the random number initial value counter 141b used for the jackpot lottery described above. The jackpot type counter 141c is also a loop counter similarly to the jackpot random number counter 141a and the random number initial value counter 141b. It is configured as follows. Similarly to the big hit random number counter 141a and the random number initial value counter 141b, the numerical value is periodically updated by the processing executed by the main control device 100 (the numerical value is periodically and repeatedly added by "1"). In the case of winning the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter 141c is used to determine the jackpot type from the plurality of types as follows.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a distribution table that is referred to when determining the type of jackpot. As shown in FIG. 11A, in the distribution table, reference numerical values and jackpot types are associated with each other. As described above, such a distribution table is stored in the distribution table area 113 of the ROM 110 of the main control device 100. When determining the jackpot type (distributing the jackpot type), the value of the jackpot type counter 141c is read as a reference value, and the jackpot type corresponding to the read reference value is acquired from the sorting table, thereby obtaining the jackpot type To decide.

For example, in the sorting table illustrated in FIG. 11A, the reference numerical values “0” to “9”
”Corresponds to“ Normal 15R jackpot ”, so if the reference numerical value acquired from the jackpot type counter 141c is any value from“ 0 ”to“ 9 ”, the jackpot type is usually 15R jackpot . Similarly, if the reference numerical value acquired from the jackpot type counter 141c is any numerical value from “10” to “14”, it becomes an implicit probability variable 2R jackpot, and any numerical value from “15” to “19” Then, it becomes the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot,
Any numerical value from “20” to “29” is a probability variation 15R jackpot.

Here, if the time interval for adding “1” to the value of the jackpot type counter 141c is equal, the ratio at which the numerical value of the jackpot type counter 141c takes each value from “0” to “29” Therefore, the ratio assigned to each jackpot type is proportional to the number of reference numerical values associated with each jackpot type. Therefore, if a configuration in which the jackpot type is determined using the sorting table in which the reference numerical value and the jackpot type are associated with each other as described above, the reference number that associates the ratio of each jackpot type with the jackpot type is used. It is possible to easily change only by changing the number. For this reason, it is possible to easily manufacture gaming machines (so-called sibling machines or derived version gaming machines, etc.) whose jackpot type allocation ratio is different from the original gaming machines based on the manufactured gaming machines. In this case, it is possible to manufacture a plurality of types of gaming machines and entertain the difference between the gaming machines.

Further, in the sorting table shown in FIG. 11A, the reference corresponding to the jackpot that shifts to the probability variation state (in this embodiment, “non-explicit probability variation 2R jackpot” “explicit probability variation 2R jackpot” “probability variation 15R jackpot”). The numerical values are 20 numerical values from “10” to “29”. In contrast, a jackpot that does not shift to a probable change state (in this embodiment, “normal 15R jackpot”)
) Are 10 numerical values from “0” to “9”. The ratio of the reference numerical values (in this example, 20 to 10) corresponds to the ratio between the ratio of shifting to the probability variation state and the ratio of not shifting. As described above, since the jackpot that shifts to the probability change state is a jackpot that is very advantageous for the player, the interest of the game is greatly influenced by the size of the ratio that shifts to the probability change state. In this respect, if such a sort table is used,
The rate of transition to the probabilistic state is determined by the number of reference values associated with each jackpot type. By associating an appropriate number of reference values with each jackpot type, the rate of transition to the probable state can be set appropriately. It is. Further, since it is only necessary to set the number of reference numerical values in the sorting table, it can be easily set.

In addition, the big hit lottery is performed when the first operation port 25a or the second operation port 25b enters the ball. Whether the entered operation port is the first operation port 25a or the second operation port 25b. Depending on the situation, different sort tables may be referred to. Ball game machine 1 of this embodiment
In the case of 0, when a big hit lottery is performed in response to a ball entering the first operating port 25a, FIG.
Using the sorting table shown in FIG. 11 (b) when a lottery lottery is performed using the sorting table shown in FIG. 1 (a) as a trigger for entering the second operating port 25b And

In the sorting table for the second operating ports 25b shown in FIG. 11B, the reference numerical values corresponding to the big hits (normally 15R big hits in this embodiment) that do not shift to the probability variation state are from “0” to “9”. It is 10 numerical values. On the other hand, the reference numerical values corresponding to the jackpot that shifts to the probability variation state are 20 numerical values from “10” to “29”. The number of these reference numerical values is the same as that of the sorting table for the first working port 25a described above. Therefore,
In the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the rate of transition to the probability variation state is that when the big hit is generated by entering the first operating port 25a and the big hit is generated by entering the second operating port 25b. In both cases, they are equal.

On the other hand, in the sorting table shown in FIG. 11 (b), the jackpot for shifting to the probability variation state is set only to “probability variation 15R jackpot”, and therefore the jackpot accompanying the transition to the probability variation state is the second operation. When it occurs due to the ball entering the mouth 25b, the probability variation 15R big hit always occurs. As described above, since it is difficult for the player to enter the large entrance 60 with the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot and the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, for the player, these implicit probability variation 2
Probability 15R jackpot is more advantageous than R jackpot or explicit probability 2R jackpot. For this reason, if the ratio of the probability variation 15R jackpot of the sorting table corresponding to the second operation port 25b is increased in this way, the ball enters the second operation port 25b rather than the first operation port 25a. Can be desired by the player. In this way, by providing an advantage-disadvantage difference between the two operation ports, the game ball is launched while aiming to enter one of the two operation ports (the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b). It becomes possible to add a game to the ball game machine 10.

Further, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, although the sorting tables corresponding to the plurality of operating ports 25 are made different from each other in this way, as described above, the rate of transition to the probability changing state is The first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b are equal. That is, in the distribution table of the first operating port 25a and the distribution table of the second operating port 25b, the ratio of shifting to the probability variation state (in this embodiment, “indefinite probability variation 2R jackpot” “explicit probability variation 2R jackpot” “probability variation 15R jackpot” The ratio between the jackpots that shift to the probability variation state (the ratios of “non-explicit probability variation 2R jackpot”, “explicit probability variation 2R jackpot”, “probability variation 15R jackpot”) is changed. As described above, the interest of the game is greatly influenced by the size of the rate of transition to the probability variation state, but the ratio between each jackpot that transitions to the probability variation state is changed without changing the proportion of transition to the probability variation state. In this case, as described above, the second operating port 25b is advantageously set for the player, so that a game aiming at the second operating port 25b is added to the game, but the first operating port 25a is entered. It is possible to avoid a possibility that the interest of the game is greatly different between the case where the game is entered and the case where the ball enters the second operation port 25b.

Further, since there is a high probability that the jackpot will be won again in the probability variation state, when winning the jackpot that shifts to the probability variation state, it is normal that many prize balls are paid out thereafter. For this reason, if the ratio which transfers to a probability change state differs greatly with the 1st operation port 25a and the 2nd operation port 25b, the 1st
There may be a large difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out depending on which one of the operation opening 25a and the second operation opening 25b is easier to enter. Furthermore, each player has a change in which one of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b is easy to enter due to a subtle difference in the way of aiming when firing the game ball. In addition, there may be a large difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out (so-called number of balls). In general, for game halls that operate with a ball game machine installed, it is preferable that there is less variation in the number of balls, but as described above, the rate of transition to the probabilistic state is made equal among a plurality of operating ports. If this is done, it is possible to avoid the possibility that a large variation in the number of balls will be generated while a game that aims at the operating port is added to the game by advantageously setting a specific operating port for the player. Is possible.

On the other hand, when the ratio of jackpots for shifting to the probability variation state is made different among the plurality of operating ports 25, the difference between the advantages and disadvantages of the operating ports can be further clarified. The player aims at the specific operating port more actively, and can improve the interest of the game aiming at the specific operating port. In addition, since the interest of the game after the jackpot is different depending on the operation opening that is the trigger of the jackpot, the game has diversity, and as a result, the player's interest can be attracted by the game.

In the bullet ball gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, it is advantageous for the player to enter the second operation port 25b. From the viewpoint of aiming a specific operating port for the player, either one of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b may be advantageously set for the player. It is more preferable to set the opening 25b advantageously. That is, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 41 is provided in the vicinity of the second operating port 25b (see FIG. 3), and when the electric accessory 41 is in an open state (FIG. 3 ( a)), it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second operation port 25b. Therefore, if the second operating port 25b is advantageously set for the player, the player will pay attention to the operation of the electric accessory 41, and as a result, the player can be more strongly drawn into the game. .

Furthermore, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode in which the electric accessory 41 opens and closes can be executed. As described above, in this support mode, the game ball is moved to the second operation port 25b. There are a high support mode that makes it easier to enter the ball and a low support mode that makes it harder to enter than the high support mode. If the second operating port 25b is set to be advantageous for the player, the player
Since the gaming machine is performed while expecting a high support mode in which it is easy to enter the operation port 25b, it is possible to attract the player's interest in whether or not the high support mode is started. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, whether or not the high support mode is started is determined for each jackpot type, so the jackpot of the type in which the high support mode is started (in this embodiment, “ The player tends to desire to win the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, “normal 15R jackpot”, “probability variation 15R jackpot”). For this reason, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in which type of jackpot occurs.

In addition, as described above, since the electric accessory 41 may operate due to the ball entering the through operation port 24 (see FIG. 2), the player enters the through operation port 24 with a game ball. It becomes possible to attract more attention to whether or not to do so, and it is possible to attract the player's interest to the through operation port 24. As a result, it is also possible to launch the game ball by actively aiming to enter the through operation port 24, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game in which the game ball is inserted into the through operation port 24. .

As shown in FIG. 8, the counter area 141 is provided with a “variation type counter 141d” in addition to the above-described jackpot random number counter 141a, random number initial value counter 141b, and jackpot type counter 141c. This variation type counter 141d is also a loop counter similar to the above-described counters, and repeatedly indicates a numerical value within a predetermined range. Further, like the other counters, the numerical value of the counter is periodically updated. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol variation time and symbol variation pattern in the segment type display device 70 are determined by referring to the numerical value of the variation type counter 141d. Details of such processing referring to the variation type counter 141d will be described later.

The counter area 141 is provided with a “reach random number counter 141e”. The reach random number counter 141e is also a loop counter like the other counters. Further, like the other counters, the counter value is periodically updated by the process executed by the main control device 100. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the reach effect is determined based on the numerical value of the reach random number counter 141e, and the mode of reach effect to be executed is determined. Details of the process of updating the numerical value of the reach random number counter 141e and the process of determining whether or not to execute the reach effect with reference to the numerical value of the reach random number counter 141e will be described later.

The electric accessory release counter 141f is a counter used when determining whether or not to open the electric accessory 41 with respect to the entry into the through operation port 24 described above. This electric accessory opening counter 1
41f is a loop counter like the other counters, and the numerical value of the counter is periodically updated. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory release counter 1
While acquiring the value of 41f as a lottery value, the lottery result corresponding to the lottery value is acquired with reference to the lottery table for the through operation port, thereby determining whether or not the lottery is successful. If the result of the determination is successful, the electric accessory 41 is opened for a predetermined time (see FIG. 3B). The details of the process for determining whether or not to make such a determination or opening the electric accessory 41 will be described in detail later. In addition, the counter area 141 is provided with a remaining round counter 141g. The remaining round counter 141g will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 140 has the counter area 1 described above with reference to FIG.
In addition to 41, a reserved storage area 142 is provided. As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, another game ball is displayed while the game ball enters the operation port 25 and the segment type display device 70 displays the variation of the symbol. Further, when a ball enters the operating port 25, the ball is stored as a hold. The hold storage area 142 is a storage area for storing such hold. Further, in the present embodiment, in correspondence with the provision of the two operation ports, the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b, the reservation storage area 142 includes a “first operation port reservation storage area”. "Second
There are two reserved storage areas “operating port reserved storage areas”.

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the structure of the reserved storage area. As shown in the figure, each of the first operating port storage area and the second operation port storage area is provided with a “retention number storage area (142a, 142e)”, and the number of reservations of each operation port. Can be stored in each pending number storage area. As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to hold a maximum of four balls for each operation port, and correspondingly, The reserved number storage area stores a numerical value from “0” to “4” using 3 bits of the storage area of 1 byte (8 bits). In addition, since it is possible to hold up to four balls at each operation port, the first operation port storage area and the second operation port storage area are each “first area” as shown in the figure. "Second area"
It consists of four areas, “third area” and “fourth area”.

Each area is provided with storage areas of “big hit random number storage area (142b, 142f)”, “big hit type storage area (142c, 142g)” and “reach random number storage area (142d, 142h)”. Among these storage areas, “big hit random number storage area (142b,
142f) "can store the numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141a (see FIG. 8). As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the big hit random number counter 141a takes a value in the range from “0” to “599”. 142b, 142f) is configured to use 10 bits in a storage area of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The “big hit type storage area (142c, 142g)” (see FIG. 12) is a storage area for storing the value of the big hit type counter 141c (see FIG. 8). As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type counter 141c takes a numerical value ranging from “0” to “29”, so that the jackpot type storage area uses 5 bits of the 1-byte storage area. It has become.

The “reach random number storage area (142d, 142h)” (see FIG. 12) is a storage area for storing the numerical value of the reach random number counter 141e (see FIG. 8). Ball game machine 1 of this embodiment
At 0, the reach random number counter 141e takes a numerical value in a range from “0” to “238”, and the reach random number storage area uses a 1-byte storage area corresponding to this numerical range. In this embodiment, these groups of counters (in which values are stored in the storage area (
The jackpot random number counter, jackpot type counter, and reach random number counter) are collectively referred to as a “holding acquisition counter group”, and the value of each counter stored in the storage area is referred to as “holding counter information”.

Each of the first working port reserved storage area and the second working port reserved storage area is provided with four areas each having such a storage area, and when a hold occurs, an on-hold acquisition counter group (a big hit random number counter 141a) The values read from the jackpot type counter 141c and the reach random number counter 141e) are stored in the respective storage areas. Since four storage areas are provided for each operating port, it is possible to store the numerical value of each counter of the on-hold acquisition counter group for up to four holdings for each operating port. Yes.

In addition, when a game ball enters the operation port in a state where the symbol variation display is not performed, the symbol variation display is immediately executed. The numerical value of the counter is stored in the holding storage area 142. Based on the numerical values stored in the reserved storage area 142, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In this way, when performing the symbol variation display, whether the symbol variation display is performed or not,
What is necessary is just to perform a process with reference to the numerical value of the holding | maintenance storage area 142. FIG. For this reason, it is possible to share the process of performing the variable display of the symbols, and to keep the program simple. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the MPU 102 when executing the program and to reduce the storage capacity of the program area 111 for storing the program.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12, the holding storage area 142 is also provided with a total holding number storage area 142i for storing the total number of holdings of each operating port (total holding number). As described above, the storage area 142 stores the storage number of the first operating port 25a (the storage area (
The holding number storage area 142a) and the storage area (holding number storage area 142e) for storing the holding number of the second working port 25b are provided, respectively. In this way, the total holding number storage area 142i is provided.
If the total number of holds is stored and the total number of holds can be stored, the total number of holds can be quickly obtained by referring to the total number of holds storage area 142i.

Further, a standby area 142j is provided in the holding storage area 142. Standby area 1
Similarly to the first area to the fourth area 42j, the jackpot random number storage area, the jackpot type storage area, and the reach random number storage area are provided, and the data of the first area to the fourth area is stored in the standby area 1.
42j, or the data of the first area to the fourth area is copied to the standby area 142
It is possible to move to j. When the standby area 142j is provided in this way, when reading the on-hold counter information from the hold storage area 142, the data of the area to be read is moved to the standby area 142j or copied in advance. Then, it is possible to acquire the target on-hold counter information by reading data from the standby area 142j. Here, when storing the on-hold counter information of a plurality of operating ports in the on-hold storage area 142, or storing a plurality of on-hold counter information on the hold in the hold storage area 142, a large number of storage areas are stored in the hold storage area 142. Therefore, the assignment of the address of the memory space in the reserved storage area 142 becomes complicated, and as a result, the process of acquiring the address where the data to be read is stored tends to be complicated. In this respect, if the target data is moved to a specific area (standby area 142j) in advance, it is only necessary to read the data from the specific area when reading the data. Can be obtained.

The processing for storing the numerical value of each counter in each storage area of the hold storage area 142 and the process for obtaining the counter information at the time of hold from the storage area will be described in detail later. Although detailed description is omitted in the present embodiment, the number of reservations of each operation port stored in the number-of-holds storage area 142a and the number-of-holds storage area 142e of the storage area 142 is determined by processing executed by the main control device 100. Reflected in the lighting state of the display lamps 83a and 83b, it is possible to display the number of holdings of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 140 of the main control device 100 is provided with a flag area 143 in addition to the above-described reserved storage area 142. Flag area 143
Holds various flags that are set to ON or OFF in response to a change in the game state accompanying the progress of the game or the occurrence of a jackpot. For example, as described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states such as a normal 15R jackpot and a probability variation 15R jackpot. “Normally 15
The “R jackpot flag” and the “probability variable 15R jackpot flag” are provided in the flag area 143. When a jackpot occurs, a jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set (set to ON). When the jackpot gaming state ends, the corresponding jackpot flag is reset (set to OFF). Therefore, by referring to each jackpot flag, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot gaming state, or to determine which type of jackpot is the jackpot gaming state.

As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 such as the low-frequency entrance mode and the high-frequency entrance mode can be executed. Correspondingly, the flag area 143 is provided with a “low frequency entry mode flag” and a “high frequency entry mode flag”. Like the jackpot flag, these flags are set when each open / close mode is started, and reset when the open / close mode ends. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether each open / close mode is being executed by referring to each flag.

The flag area 143 is provided with various flags in addition to the above-described flags. These flags will be described later. Further, processing for setting or resetting each flag and processing for referring to each flag will be described in detail later.

The RAM 140 of the main control device 100 is also provided with an “electrical accessory holding area 144”. As described above, when a game ball enters the through operation port 24, the symbol variation display is performed on the through-segment display device 80. However, while the symbol variation display is being performed, the game ball passes through. When the ball enters the operating port 24, the ball is stored as a hold. The electric accessory holding area 144 is a storage area for storing such holding. The numerical value read from the electric accessory release counter 141f is temporarily stored in the electric accessory holding area 144, and when the symbol change display is completed, the numerical value is read from the electric accessory holding area 144 and the symbol change display. Will be digested. Details of these processes will be described later.

The command buffer 145 temporarily stores commands to be transmitted to peripheral devices connected to the main control device 100 (the sub control device 200, the electric accessory driving unit 42, the large entrance driving unit 62, etc.). This is a buffer area. As will be described in detail later, the main control device 100 stores various commands in the command buffer 145 according to the progress of the game, and outputs the commands to the sub-control device 200, the electric accessory driving unit 42, etc. at a predetermined timing. By
The operation of each of these devices is controlled.

The general-purpose area 146 is a general-purpose storage area in which various data can be temporarily stored when the main control device 100 controls a game, and the calculation result of the calculation device 104 can be temporarily stored. is there. The MPU 102 of the main control device 100 can appropriately execute the processing by appropriately using the general-purpose area 146 when executing various programs for controlling the game.

As described above, the main control device 100 controls the progress of the game using each of these components. At this time, various processes are performed in accordance with various sensors (such as 11s) connected to the main control device 100 and signals from the payout control device 410. In addition, by transmitting various commands from the main control device 100 to the devices such as the sub-control device 200 and the electric accessory driving unit 42 connected to the main control device 100, the operations of these devices are controlled. Control.
Hereinafter, the configuration of these peripheral devices connected to the main control device 100 will be described.

C-2. Peripheral device configuration:
The sub control device 200 is a control device that receives a command transmitted from the main control device 100 and performs various controls according to the command, and mainly plays a role of controlling various effects associated with the game. Although not described in detail, the sub control device 200 includes an MPU, a ROM, and a RAM like the main control device 100, and various processes can be executed using these devices. In addition, a display control device 300 is connected to the sub-control device 200, and the display control device 300 displays various effect images and effect symbols on the effect display device 30 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 200. An effect using the display device 30 can be executed.

When the sub control device 200 receives a command from the main control device 100, the sub control device 200 analyzes the command, acquires various types of information included in the command, and performs various effects processing according to the acquired information. For example, when a command including information related to the symbol variation display time of the segment type display device 70 and the symbol variation pattern (a “variation start command” to be described later) is received, an instruction is sent to the display control device 300 to thereby display the display control device. Effect display device 30 connected to 300
The effect design is variably displayed. At this time, since the command sent from the main control device 100 includes information on the variable display time of the symbols on the segment type display device 70, the sub-control device 200 uses the effect display device 30. It is possible to display the effect symbol variation display in accordance with the symbol variation display on the segment type display device 70. Also,
In accordance with the stop display of the symbol on the segment type display device 70, it is also possible to stop (determine display) the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 30.

As described above, the bullet ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment can achieve a reach effect, but for such reach effect, the sub control device 200 performs a predetermined process in response to a command from the main control device 100. It is realized by doing. That is, when receiving the change start command from the main control device 100, the sub control device 200 determines whether or not there is a time required for performing the reach effect based on the information regarding the change display time included in the change start command. To do. When it is determined that the reach effect can be executed, it is determined whether or not the reach effect is actually performed, and when the reach effect is performed, a predetermined command is transmitted to the display control device 300. A reach effect is executed by the effect display device 30. Not only such reach effects but also other various effects, the main control device 100 to the sub-control device 2
This is realized by sending a command to 00.

The display control device 300 is similar to the main control device 100 and the sub control device 200 in the MPU.
And a control circuit mounted with a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and various processes can be executed using each of these components. In addition, image data of various images displayed on the effect display device 30 is stored in advance. These image data are stored in a state where various kinds of encoding processing are performed, and this prevents a situation where the storage area for storing the image data becomes excessive. The display control device 300 decodes the encoded image data using an MPU or a decoding LSI, and outputs the decoded image data to the effect display device 30. By doing this, even if the image data is encoded,
It is possible to quickly display on the effect display device 30.

As shown in FIG. 7, not only the sub-control device 200 but also each sensor provided in the through operation port 24 and the operation port 25 is connected to the main control device 100. Each of the sensors provided at the entrance of the ball sends a signal to the main control device 100 when detecting the entrance of the game ball, and in response thereto, a latch circuit (not shown) provided in the main control device 100 By entering the latch state, the game ball is stored. MPU of main controller 100
102 reads out the state of the latch circuit to thereby enable the through operation port 24 and the operation port 25.
It is possible to detect a ball entering into.

The electric accessory driving unit 42 includes an actuator that opens and closes the electric accessory 41, a drive circuit that drives the actuator, and the like. The main control device 100 includes an electric accessory driving unit 4
It is possible to open and close the electric accessory 41 by transmitting a signal to 2 and operating the electric accessory driving unit 42. The large entrance opening driving unit 62 is also composed of an actuator for opening and closing the large entrance 60, a control circuit for driving the actuator, and the like, similar to the electric accessory driving unit 42. The large entrance 60 can be opened and closed by transmitting a signal to 62.

The above-mentioned segment type display device 70 is also connected to the main control device 100. For this reason, the main control device 100 can output a signal to the segment type display device 70 and perform a variable display or a stop display on the segment type display device 70.

The payout control device 410 is a device for controlling the payout device connected to the game ball tank 400 (see FIG. 5) as described above, and the game ball is operated by operating the payout device via the payout control device 410. The game balls in the tank 400 are replaced with the upper plate 13 of the ball game machine 10 (see FIG. 1).
It is possible to pay out. The main control device 100 operates the payout device via the payout control device 410 to thereby win a prize ball for entering the operation port such as the through operation port 24 and the operation port 25, the small prize port 26, and the large input. The winning ball for paying into a winning opening such as the ball opening 60 is paid out. In addition, the payout device is provided with a counter that counts the number of game balls that have been paid out. The main control device 100 refers to this counter via the payout control device 410 and is determined for each entrance. It is possible to confirm that a predetermined number of game balls have been paid out. Further, the payout device is provided with an abnormality sensor for detecting an abnormality such as when the game ball tank 400 is empty or when the game ball is not paid out normally due to clogged passages for paying out the game balls. ing. The main control device 100 can also detect whether an abnormality has occurred in the payout state of the prize ball by examining the output signal of the abnormality sensor.

As shown in FIG. 7, an external output terminal 910 is also connected to the main control device 100. As described above, the external output terminal 910 is provided on the back side of the ball game machine 10, and a cable from a hall computer installed in the game hall can be connected to the external output terminal 910 (see FIG. 5). If signals are output from the main control device 100 to the external output terminal 910 with the cable from the hall computer connected to the external output terminal 910, various signals are transmitted to the hall computer via the external output terminal 910. Is possible.

Various signals can be output to the external output terminal 910, but the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment can transmit a “hit signal” indicating that a jackpot has occurred. ing. In addition, various modes can be adopted as modes for outputting the jackpot signal, but simply, a pulse may be output when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. In this way, the hall computer can easily detect that the jackpot has occurred by detecting the pulse. Alternatively, instead of temporarily outputting a signal when a jackpot is generated, the signal may be continuously output while the jackpot occurs and the jackpot gaming state continues. For example, the voltage level is kept at a low level (“Low” state) while not in the jackpot gaming state, while the voltage level is kept at a high level (“High” state) while the jackpot gaming state is continued. In this way, the hall computer can detect that the jackpot has occurred by detecting a change in the voltage level. In addition, since the voltage level corresponds to the current gaming state (in this case, whether or not the jackpot gaming state), it is easy to determine whether or not the jackpot gaming state is still ongoing by examining the voltage level It is possible to detect.

As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a “special loss” may occur, but a signal (special failure signal) may be output even in such a special failure. As described above, the special entrance is performed by opening and closing the large entrance 60, so that the special release can be regarded as being similar to the jackpot. Therefore, if a signal is output even in the case of such a special deviation, it is preferable that the hall computer can accurately grasp that the large entrance 60 is opened and closed. Further, when outputting a special out signal, the jackpot signal and the special out signal may be output together from one signal line (terminal). For example, the voltage level of a specific terminal is set to a high level when either a jackpot or a special loss occurs, and the voltage level of the terminal is set to a low level when none occurs. In this way, the hall computer can grasp whether or not the large entrance 60 is opened and closed by simply examining the voltage of one signal line, which is preferable. Of course, the jackpot and extraordinary loss may be output from separate terminals. In such a case, the hall computer checks the voltage at each terminal to determine whether the jackpot or extraordinary loss occurred. Can be grasped.

In addition, the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment outputs a predetermined signal even when the game balls in the game ball tank 400 are insufficient. Thereby, the game hall can detect the shortage of game balls by the hall computer, and the bullet ball game machine 10 can be operated normally by taking measures such as supplying the game balls.

Further, a signal indicating that the game ball has been paid out and a signal indicating that the game ball has been discharged from the out port 50 can be output. Various modes can be adopted for outputting these signals. For example, a pulse may be output each time a game ball is paid out or discharged from the out port 50. In such a case, a pulse may be output for each game ball, or a pulse may be output for each predetermined number of game balls (for example, every 10 balls). In any case, the hall computer can know the number of game balls paid out and the number of game balls discharged from the out port 50 by counting pulses. Alternatively, the number of game balls that have been fired may be grasped by a hall computer by outputting a pulse each time a game ball is fired. In this way, it is possible to grasp not only the number of game balls discharged from the out port 50 (so-called out number) but also the difference between the number of game balls fired and the out number (so-called safe number). .

In addition, it is possible to output a signal indicating that the front panel 15 (see FIG. 1) is opened. In order to output such a signal, a sensor or switch is provided between the front panel 15 and the main body, and the open / closed state of the front panel 15 may be detected by the sensor or switch. Alternatively, the opening / closing state of the front panel 15 may not be directly detected, but indirectly detected based on the state of the key portion 17. For example, a sensor is provided in the key unit 17 and the locked state of the key unit 17 is detected by the sensor. Normally, when the ball game machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the key portion 17
Is locked, it can be assumed that when the key portion 17 is unlocked, the front panel 15 is opened. Therefore, if a signal indicating the sensor state provided in the key portion 17 is output, the open / closed state of the front panel 15 can be detected by the hall computer. In addition, if the state of the key part 17 is detected in this way, even if the key part 17 is forgotten to be locked after the front panel 15 is closed, it can be detected by the hall computer that the key part 17 is not locked. . As a result, it is possible to avoid a risk of receiving an illegal act due to a lack of locking of the key portion 17.

These various signals may be output using different signal lines and terminals for each signal, or may be output by sharing the signal lines and terminals among a plurality of signals. Good. For example, if so-called serial communication is performed or a plurality of signals are collectively encoded into one signal, a signal line and a terminal can be shared between the plurality of signals. In this way, even when the number of signal lines and the number of terminals are limited, it is possible to output many types of signals.

In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game is controlled using the above-described components. Below, the control process performed using each structure of the ball game machine 10 is demonstrated in detail.

D. Main control unit control contents:
D-1. Main loop processing:
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of the “main loop process” executed in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment. This process is read from the program area 111 of the main control device 100 when the ball game machine 10 is activated, and the MP of the main control device 100 is read.
This process is executed on the U102. Although not shown in FIG. 13, when the ball game machine 10 is activated, a power failure recovery process for returning the ball ball game machine 10 to the state at the time of the power failure occurs, and then FIG. The main loop process is executed. Also, when a power failure occurs,
The power failure process such as stopping the MPU 102 and supplying the backup voltage to the RAM 140 is performed, but detailed description of these processes is omitted.

As shown in the figure, in the main loop process, steps S1000 to S1 are performed.
A series of processing up to 010 is sequentially performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of a series of processing (processing from step S1000 to step S1010) (step S1012). (Step S
1012: Yes), it returns to step S1000, and when it has not elapsed (step S
1012: No), while performing the remaining time processing of step S1014, the determination of whether the time has passed (step S1012) is repeated. Therefore, in the main loop process, a series of processes from step S1000 to step S1010 are repeatedly executed at a predetermined time period.

In the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, each process is repeatedly executed as described above, and when a game ball enters the through operation port 24, the operation port 25, etc. Each step executes various processes or executes a predetermined process according to the passage of time to control the game. In each of these processes, the sub-control device 20
By transmitting various commands and signals to peripheral devices such as 0, various effects are performed and prize balls are paid out according to the progress of the game. As a result, the game progresses in the entire ball and ball game machine 10. Hereinafter, the details of each process of the main loop process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When starting the main loop process, the MPU 102 of the main control apparatus 100 first executes an external output process (step S1000) for outputting a command or a signal to each apparatus connected to the main control apparatus 100. As described above, in the main loop process, step S
A series of processes from 1000 to step S1010 are repeatedly executed at a predetermined time period. As will be described later, in each of these processes, a command to be transmitted to peripheral devices is stored in the RAM 1.
40 command buffers 145 (see FIG. 7). Therefore, step S1000
In the external output process, the command stored in the command buffer 145 is transmitted to the peripheral device.

For example, a payout control device 410 is connected to the main control device 100 of the ball and ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, and it is possible to pay out prize balls by operating the payout control device 410. In response to this, a “prize ball command” for instructing the payout control device 410 to pay out a prize ball is transmitted. This prize ball command includes information on the number of prize balls to be paid out, and the payout control device 410 can pay out an appropriate number of prize balls by operating in accordance with the prize ball command. It is also possible to transmit a change start command, a change end command, etc., which will be described later, to the sub-control device 200, and in this way, the sub-control device 200.
It is possible to display the effect image on the effect display device 30 by driving the display control device 300 via the. The process of storing these various commands in the command buffer 145 will be described in a timely manner while proceeding with the description along the flowchart of the main loop process.

Further, as described above, the ball game machine 10 is provided with the external output terminal 910, and various information can be output to a device installed outside the ball game machine 10, such as a hall computer. In the external output process of step S1000, a process of outputting a signal to the external output terminal 910 can also be performed. For example, referring to the flag area 143 described above,
Various flags such as a jackpot flag indicating that the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state and a special miss flag indicating that a special miss has occurred are read out. Information can be transmitted to an external device by outputting a signal to each terminal of the external output terminal 910 in accordance with the state of each flag.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13, after the external output process (step S1000) is performed, the value of the variation type counter 141d is then updated (step S1002).
As described above, since the variation type counter 141d is provided in the counter area 141 of the RAM 140 (see FIG. 8), the MPU 102 accesses the RAM 140 and adds “1” to the numerical value of the variation type counter 141d. The numerical value of the variation type counter 141d is updated. At this time, as described above, since the counter area 141 is provided with a buffer (variation type buffer) corresponding to the variation type counter 141d, when the counter value is updated, the updated value is stored in the variation type buffer. To do.

As described above, when the value of the counter area 141 is updated and the value of the variation type buffer is made to match the value of the variation type counter 141d, the value of the variation type counter 141d is obtained by reading the variation type buffer. Is possible. Therefore, even when the fluctuation type counter 141d cannot be directly accessed such as during the update of the value of the fluctuation type counter 141d, the value of the fluctuation type counter 141d can be acquired. In addition, when the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter 141d is changed due to an illegal act, a deviation occurs between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter 141d and the numerical value of the fluctuation type buffer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage caused by fraud.

After updating the value of the variation type counter 141d (step S1002 in FIG. 13), the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal from the payout control device 410 are read (step S1).
004). As described above, the payout control device 410 is provided with a counter that counts the payout of prize balls and an abnormal sensor that detects that an abnormality has occurred in the payment, so the MPU 102 reads signals from these counters and sensors. This makes it possible to confirm that the winning ball has been paid out normally. It should be noted that when acquiring these pieces of information relating to payout of prize balls from the payout control device 410, it is possible to directly acquire a signal from the payout control device 410, or the payout control device 410 stores information on the RAM 140. The MPU 102 may read and acquire the written information.

When the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal are read (step S1004), in the subsequent step S1006, a “symbol game process” for performing various processes relating to the symbol display is executed.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the flow of the symbol game process. As shown in the figure, when the process is started, it is first determined whether or not the large entrance 60 is in the open / close mode (step S1).
030). As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the large entrance 60 can execute an open / close mode in which the open / close operation is repeated, and during such an open / close mode, “
Open / close mode flag "is set. Therefore, the MPU 102 can determine whether or not the large entrance 60 is in the open / close mode by reading the state of the open / close mode flag with reference to the flag area 143. The process for setting the open / close mode flag will be described later.

When it is determined that the large entrance 60 is in the open / close mode (step S1030: Yes),
Since the current gaming state is a gaming state that does not display a variable display of symbols such as jackpot gaming state,
The symbol game process ends and the process returns to the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the large entrance 60 is not in the open / close mode (step S1030: No), it is then determined whether or not the variable display of the symbol is being executed on the segment type display device 70 (step S1032). ).
That is, when the symbol variation display has already been started on the segment type display device 70, it is not necessary to display the symbol variation repeatedly. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed, and depending on the determination result. Switch the process. It can be determined by referring to the symbol changing flag in the flag area 143 whether or not the symbol is changing.

When the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1032: No), various preparation processes for executing the symbol variation display may be performed. However, as described above, the ball game machine 10 displays the variation of the symbol when the ball enters the operating port 25. Therefore, if there is no ball entering the operating port or there is no holding of the ball, the symbol is displayed. There is no need to display fluctuations. Therefore, first, the total number of reservations is confirmed with reference to the total number-of-holds storage area 142i of the storage area 142 (see FIG. 12) (step S1034). As will be described in detail later, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, if there is a ball in the first operating port 25a or the second operating port 25b, the number-of-holds storage areas (142a and 142e) of the respective operating ports are stored. When "1" is added to the numerical value and the hold is digested,
1 "is subtracted. Further, as described above, the total number-of-holds storage area 142i has the first working port 2
Since the sum of the number of holdings of 5a and the number of holdings of the second operating port 25b is stored, if the value of the total holding number storage area 142i is “0”, the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b This means that there is no entry or hold at any of the operating ports.

Therefore, if the numerical value of the total number-of-holds storage area 142i is “0” (step S in FIG. 14).
1034: Yes), since it is not necessary to perform the symbol variation display, the symbol game process is terminated and the process returns to the main loop process. On the other hand, if the numerical value in the total number-of-holds storage area 142i is not “0” (step S1034: No), the “variable display preparation process” in step S1036 is started in order to perform the symbol variable display.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the flow of the variable display preparation process. As shown in the drawing, when the variable display preparation process is started, first, an operation port to be processed is determined (step S1050). In other words, as described above, the ball game machine 10 displays the change of the symbol in response to the ball entering the operation port, but in this embodiment, the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b are displayed in two.
Since one operation port is provided, it is determined which of the operation ports is subjected to the variable display for entering the ball.

It is possible to determine as follows which of the operation ports to enter the variation display. First, the hold number storage area 142a and the hold number storage area 142e (see FIG. 12)
By reading these numerical values, the number of holdings of the first working port 25a and the number of holdings of the second working port 25b are grasped. When only one of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b has a holding (when the other holding number is “0”), the variable opening may be displayed for the operating port with the holding. Therefore, the operation port with the hold is set as the target of the variable display preparation process. On the other hand, when there is a hold in both the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b (when neither of the numbers in the hold number storage area 142a and the hold number storage area 142e is “0”), Although it is possible to set the operation port as a target of processing, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second operation port 25 is used.
b is given priority for processing.

In this way, if there is even one hold in the second working port 25b, the second working port 25b is digested first regardless of the number of the first working port 25a held, so the second working port 25b After all of the hold is digested, the hold of the first working port 25a is digested. As described above, the distribution table to be referred to is different between the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b (see FIG. 11), so that the ratio of the jackpot type is set to the first operating port 25a and the second operating port. 25b
It is possible to make a difference between the two and, in turn, it is possible to make a difference in the advantage and disadvantage for the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player feel the comfort that the reservation of the working opening is prioritized and the frustration that the holding of the advantageous working opening is not easily digested.

Further, as described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the embodiment, the distribution table for the second operation port 25b (see FIG. 11B) is the distribution table for the first operation port 25a (see FIG. 11A).
The ratio of 15R jackpots (usually 15R jackpots and probability variation 15R jackpots) is set to be larger than that)).
The operating port 25b is more advantageous than the first operating port 25a. In this way, if priority is given to the suspension of the operating opening advantageous for the player, it is possible to make the player feel that the state advantageous to the player continues and to attract the player to the game. .

When the working port to be subjected to the fluctuation display preparation process is determined (step S1050 in FIG. 15),
Next, since the hold is digested and the change display is performed, the number of hold of the target working port is reduced by 1 (step S1052). As described above, the number of holdings for each operating port is stored in the holding number storage area of the holding storage area 142 (see 142a and 142e in FIG. 12), so it is stored in the holding number storage area of the target operating port. "1" is subtracted from the numerical value. Further, since “1” is subtracted from the number of holdings of the operating ports, “1” is also subtracted from the numerical value in the total holding number storage area 142 i that stores the total value of the number of holdings of each operating port. When the number of holds is reduced (step S in FIG. 15)
1052) Then, the following processes are performed in order to actually digest the suspension.

First, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the memory areas are pre-ordered in the order of the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area, and the game ball enters the operation port and is held. Occurs, the on-hold counter information corresponding to the incoming ball is stored in each storage area in this order (stored in the order of the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area). Therefore, also when digesting the suspension, according to this ordering, the suspension can be digested in the order in which the balls are entered if digested sequentially from the on-hold counter information of the first area. Therefore, first, the on-hold counter information of the first area is stored in the standby area 142j (step S1054). As described above, if the on-hold counter information to be read in the on-hold storage area 142 is stored in the standby area 142j in advance, the on-hold counter information can be easily read from the standby area 142j. Therefore, by storing the on-hold counter information of the first area in the standby area 142j in this way, the “variable display start process” (FIG. 1) to be executed later is performed.
4 at step S1038), it is possible to quickly read the on-hold counter information. The on-hold counter information is stored in each area of the hold storage area 142 by a “timer interrupt process” described later. This point will be described in detail later.

When the hold information of the first area is stored in the standby area 142j, the counter information at the time of holding in each of the second area, the third area, and the fourth area is shifted to the front area one area at a time ( Step S1056). That is, the counter information on hold in the second area is moved to the first area, the counter information on hold in the third area is moved to the second area,
Move the area holding counter information to the third area. In this way, if the on-hold counter information is shifted to the front area, it is sufficient to always store the on-hold counter information of the first area in the standby area 142j when digesting the hold, and it is necessary to switch the storage area. Absent. Therefore, the MPU 102 does not have to switch the address that designates the storage area in the RAM 140, so that the processing of the MPU 102 can be kept simple. Further, since it is not necessary to describe the address switching process in the program, the program size can be kept compact, and the storage area of the ROM 110 for storing the program can be saved. Become.

After the data in the holding storage area 142 is shifted (step S1056 in FIG. 15), a “variable display target flag” is then set in order to store the operation port subjected to the variable display (step S1058). . The variation display target flag may be any form of flag as long as the operation port that is the subject of variation display can be determined. For example, a flag is provided for each working port, and a flag of a mode in which the flag of the working port that is the subject of the fluctuation display is set (set to ON) and the flag of the other working port is reset (set to OFF). Use it. In this way, it is possible to identify the operating port that is subject to symbol variation by referring to the flag of each operating port. In addition, since the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment has two operation ports (the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b), a flag is not provided for each operation port. It is also possible to provide only one. For example, the flag is reset (set to OFF) when the subject of the symbol variation display is the first operating port 25a, and the flag is set (set to ON) when the symbol is the second operating port 25b. By doing so, it is possible to determine which operating port is subject to symbol variation by using one flag, so that it is possible to save the capacity of the flag area 143 (see FIG. 7) where the flag is provided. is there. In this example,
It is assumed that the variable display target flag of this method is used.

When the variable display target flag is set (FIG. 15: step S1058), the sub-control device 2
A “hold shift notification command” to be transmitted to 00 is set (step S1060). That is, since the data in the holding storage area 142 has been shifted in the previous step S1056, a command (holding shift notification command) for notifying the sub-control device 200 to that effect is stored in the command buffer 145. The hold shift notification command includes information for specifying the operation port to which the hold information is shifted (that is, the operation port subjected to the change display of the symbol), and the sub-control device 200 executes the hold shift notification command. By receiving it, it becomes possible to identify the operating port that is the subject of the variable display. Thereby, for example, it is possible to determine the aspect of the effect depending on which operation port is the target of the variable display, such as performing a different effect for each operation port.

Further, as described above, the bullet ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with the display lamp 83 on the game board 20 indicating the number of holdings of each operation port (see FIG. 2). In the present embodiment, the lighting state of these display lamps 83 is controlled by the main control device 100, but may be controlled by the sub control device 200. That is, the sub-control device 200
Since it is possible to grasp that the hold has been completed by receiving the hold shift notification command, the number of hold of each operation port is displayed on the display lamp 83 by receiving the hold shift notification command and updating the lighting state of the display lamp 83. It can be reflected appropriately.

Alternatively, the sub-control device 200 displays various effect symbols that reflect the number of holds on the effect display device 3.
It may be displayed as 0. For example, a different design symbol is associated with each number of holdings in advance, and a design symbol corresponding to the number of holdings is displayed on the effect display device 30, or
More simply, the number of holds may be displayed on the effect display device 30 as a number. In such a case, the sub-control device 200 can grasp that the hold has been digested by receiving the hold shift notification command, so that it is possible to update the effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 30 in synchronization with the digest of the hold. It is. In this way, it is possible to make the player visually recognize not only the display lamp 83 but also the effect display device 30 that the number of holds changes. Since the effect display device 30 is provided at a position that is easily visible to the player in the center of the game board 20, this makes it possible for the player to effectively enjoy the interest in increasing or decreasing the number of holds.

In addition, as described above, it is possible to specify the operating opening digested with the hold, so it is also possible to display a different effect design for each operating opening and update only the effect design of the operating opening digested with hold. is there. As described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to vary the advantage for the player for each operation port 25. The player's interest also varies depending on the operation port 25. there,
If the effect design reflecting the number of reservations is displayed for each operation port, the player can enjoy the interest that the number of reservations increases or decreases while being aware of the difference in advantage and disadvantage for each operation port. In addition, if there is a difference in the advantages and disadvantages of each operating port, the advantageous design of the operating port becomes more important to the player, so it is not possible to discriminate by simply looking at which design symbol corresponds to which holding port. If the effect symbol is displayed, the player tries to determine which effect symbol is important. For example, for the suspension of the first operating port 25a, an effect design imitating an animal is displayed, and the second operating port 25 is displayed.
If the display design imitating a plant is displayed for the hold of b, the player cannot determine which design is important at a glance, so which is the effective design corresponding to the operating opening that is advantageous to him / her? I try to find out. As described above, if the effect symbols important for the player are displayed together with other effect symbols, it is possible to provide the player with a new way of enjoying such as determining the important effect symbols from the plurality of effect symbols.

When the hold shift notification command is set (FIG. 15: Step S1060), the variable display preparation process is terminated and the process returns to the symbol game process of FIG. Once the symbol variation display is prepared by the variation display preparation process described above, the “variation display start process” for actually starting the symbol variation display is executed (FIG. 14: step S1038).

16 and 17 are flowcharts showing the flow of the variable display start process. As shown in the drawing, in the variable display start process, first, a lottery table used for determining whether or not the big hit lottery is successful is determined (step S1070). That is, the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment is
Since the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability change state (see FIG. 10 (a)) and the jackpot lottery table for the probability change state (see FIG. 10 (b)) are provided, whether the gaming state is the probability change state or the non-probability change state Accordingly, a lottery table to be used for determination of success / failure is determined. Whether the gaming state is a probability change state or a non-probability change state can be determined by referring to the “probability change state flag” in the flag area 143. This probability variation state flag is a flag that is set (set to ON) when the gaming state shifts to the probability variation state, and is reset (set to OFF) when the gaming state transitions to the non-probability variation state. The process for setting the probability variation state flag will be described later.

When the probability variation state flag is set to ON, the gaming state is a probability variation state, so the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state is used for the determination of success / failure. On the other hand, when the probability variation state flag is set to OFF, the gaming state is a non-probability variation state, and therefore a jackpot lottery table for the non-probability variation state is used. When the lottery table used for the big hit lottery is determined, next, whether or not the big hit lottery is actually determined is determined using the big hit lottery table (FIG. 16: Step S1072).
.

Whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful is determined by comparing the value of the jackpot random number storage area of the standby area 142j with the jackpot lottery table determined previously. That is, as described above, the lottery value and the lottery result are associated with the jackpot lottery table (FIG. 10).
The lottery lottery result is acquired by reading the corresponding lottery result from the jackpot random number table using the numerical value stored in the jackpot random number storage area as the lottery value.

Here, as described above, the jackpot random number storage area is a storage area in which the numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is stored when a ball enters the operation port 25. Therefore, the numerical value in the jackpot random number storage area is a numerical value acquired when the ball enters the operation port 25. For this reason, determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful using the numerical values in the jackpot random number storage area effectively means performing the jackpot lottery based on the entrance to the operating port (entrance timing). Equivalent to. Thereby, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, although the timing of the game ball entering the operating port 25 is not strictly matched with the timing, it is substantially not determined,
It is possible to perform a jackpot lottery based on the entry into the operating port.

When the determination result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S1074: Yes), since there are a plurality of jackpot types in the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined from them. The jackpot type can be determined using a sorting table (see FIG. 11), but as described above, the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment includes a plurality of sorting tables. Therefore, it is first determined which of the plurality of distribution tables is to be used (step S1076).

As illustrated in FIG. 11, the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a distribution table for the first working port 25a and a sorting table for the second working port 25b. Therefore, if the ball that triggered the jackpot lottery is a ball entering the first operating port 25a, a sorting table for the first port 25a is used, and if a ball entering the second port 25b, A sorting table for the second working port 25b is used. Since the operating opening which is the target of the jackpot lottery is the operating port which is the target of the variation display preparation process of FIG. 15, by examining the operating port determined in step S1050 of the variation preparation process, It is possible to identify the operating port that has become defective. As described above, in the variation display preparation process, the operation port to be processed is stored by the “variation display target flag” (see step S1058 in FIG. 15). And a sorting table for the operation port may be used. In the present embodiment, in the variation display preparation process, when the symbol variation display target is the first operation port 25a, the variation display target flag is reset (set to OFF), and the second operation port 25b is set.
In this case, since the variable display target flag is “ON”, the distribution table for the second operating port is used, and when the variable display target flag is “OFF”, the first is set.
A sorting table for the working ports may be used.

When the distribution table to be referred to is determined, the jackpot type is determined by actually referring to the distribution table (FIG. 16: step S1078). As illustrated in FIG. 11, since the jackpot type is associated with the reference value in the reference table, the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot table and acquiring the jackpot type corresponding to the reference value. Is possible. Here, as a reference value when referring to the jackpot table, the waiting area 1
A numerical value stored in the jackpot type storage area 42j may be used. As described above, since the value of the jackpot type counter 141c is stored in the jackpot type storage area, the jackpot type can be determined based on the value of the jackpot counter 141c by using the value of the jackpot type storage area. It becomes possible. Further, the numerical value of the jackpot type storage area is stored in response to the entry of the game ball into the operation port, similarly to the numerical value of the jackpot random number storage area described above. Therefore, by determining the jackpot type based on the numerical value of the jackpot type storage area in this way, it is possible to determine the jackpot type substantially based on the ball entering the operation port.

After performing the above-described processing related to the jackpot lottery, this time, the symbol stop display mode to be performed after the symbol variation display ends is determined, and various data for setting the symbol stop display in the determined mode are set. Process. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot to stop and display the symbols in a manner reflecting the jackpot lottery result (step S10).
74: Yes), “stop mode setting process for jackpot” is performed (step S1082), and when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (in the case of losing) (step S1074: No)
), “Exit stop mode setting process” is performed (step S1084).

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the flow of stop mode setting processing for jackpot. This process is a process that is executed when the result of the determination of whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful is a process of setting various data for stopping and displaying symbols in a manner corresponding to the jackpot.
Here, since there are a plurality of types of jackpots in the ball and ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the stop display is performed, the stop display is performed in a manner reflecting such jackpot types. Correspondingly, in the jackpot stop mode setting process, the jackpot type is determined and processing is performed for each type.

As shown in the figure, first, it is determined whether or not the normal 15R big hit (step S110).
0), if it is a normal 15R jackpot (step S1100: Yes), step S1118
Branches to and usually performs a 15R jackpot process. Usually, if it is not 15R big hit (step S1100: No), it is then determined whether or not the probability variation 15R big hit (step S110).
2) If the probability variation 15R big hit (step S1102: Yes), step S111
The process branches to 4, and processing for the probability variation 15R jackpot is performed. Similarly, if it is not the probability variation 15R big hit (step S1102: No), it is subsequently determined whether or not it is an explicit probability variation 2R big hit (step S1104). And the processing for explicit probability variation 2R jackpot is performed. If it is not an explicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1104: No), it can be determined that it is an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, so processing for an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot is performed (step S1106). When processing is branched according to the type of jackpot in this way, in each processing at the branch destination (step S1106, step S1110, step S1114, step S1118), by referring to the “stop mode table” described below, The stop display mode is determined.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a stop mode table. In FIG. 19 (a), normally 15R
A stop mode table for jackpot is shown, FIG. 19B shows a stop mode table for probability variation 15R jackpot, FIG. 19C shows a stop mode table for implicit probability variable 2R jackpot, FIG. In (d), a stop mode table for explicit probability variation 2R jackpot is shown. As described above, the stop mode table is stored in the stop mode table area 114 of the ROM 110 (see FIG. 7).

As shown in FIG. 19, the stop mode table includes two display patterns of symbols on the segment type display device 70 ("display pattern 1" to "display pattern 2" in the figure).
A plurality of stop mode data are set. A reference numerical value is associated with each stop mode data. For example, in the stop mode table for normal 15R jackpot (see FIG. 19A), as shown in the figure, the character “F” is represented for the reference numerical values from “0” to “4”. Stop mode data (data 1) in which a display pattern and a display pattern representing a character “L.” are set are associated with each other.

When performing stop display of symbols, the stop mode data is read from such a stop mode table, the display pattern of the segment type display device 70 is acquired, and each LED of the segment type display device 70 is turned on according to the acquired display pattern. Thus, it is possible to appropriately perform the symbol stop display. The stop mode data includes “display pattern 1” and “display pattern 2”.
The display pattern 1 is used as a pattern when the left display portion 72 (see FIG. 4) of the segment type display device 70 is turned on. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 19, the stop mode table corresponding to 15R jackpot (FIG. 19 (
a) “Normal 15R jackpot stoppage table” and “Probability 15R” in FIG.
In the jackpot stop mode table "), a pattern representing the character" F "is set in the display pattern 1, while the stop mode table corresponding to 2R jackpot (" implicit probability change "in FIG. 19C). 2R jackpot stop mode table "and" explicit probability change 2R "in FIG.
In the big hit stop mode table “), a display pattern representing the number“ 2 ”is set in the display pattern 1. As a result, the symbol displayed on the left display portion 72 of the segment type display device 70 (the symbol set in the display pattern 1) corresponds to the number of rounds of the jackpot. It is possible to notify.

On the other hand, the display pattern 2 may be used when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the central display unit 74 or the right display unit 76. At this time, the display unit for stopping and displaying the symbol is determined depending on which of the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b is entered into the operation port and the symbol variation display is performed. Also good. For example, when the entry into the first operation port 25a is triggered, it is displayed on the central display unit 74, and when the entry into the second operation port 25b is triggered, the right display unit 76 is displayed. To display. In this way, it is possible to notify which of the operating ports has entered the ball and triggered the symbol stop display.

Since the stop mode table is provided for each jackpot type, when reading the stop mode data from the stop mode table, the stop mode table corresponding to each jackpot may be referred to according to the jackpot type. Here, when acquiring stop mode data with reference to the stop mode table, first, a reference numerical value is acquired, and stop mode data associated with the reference numerical value is acquired. As this reference numerical value, a numerical value stored in the jackpot type storage area of the standby area 142j may be used. As described above, since the value of the jackpot type counter is stored in the jackpot type storage area of the standby area 142j, the stop mode data acquired from the stop mode table is thus based on the value of the jackpot type counter. Can be determined.

Here, in this embodiment, the reference numerical value ranges of the respective stop mode tables correspond to the above-described reference numerical value ranges of the sorting table. For example, in the sorting table for the first working port 25a shown in FIG. 11A, a numerical value from “0” to “9” is normally set as a reference numerical value for 15R big hit. On the other hand, the normal 15 shown in FIG.
In the stop mode table for R jackpot, the reference value from “0” to “4” is associated with the stop mode data 1, and the reference value from “5” to “9” is associated with the stop mode data 2. As a whole 15R big hit stop mode table, numerical values from “0” to “9” are associated with each other as in the distribution table of FIG.

In this way, if the range of the reference numerical value in the distribution table is associated with the range of the reference numerical value in the stop mode table, when the stop mode table is referred to using the value of the jackpot type counter as the reference value, the stop corresponding to the reference value Since the mode data is surely present in the stop mode table, the stop mode data can be reliably acquired. Therefore, the value of the jackpot type counter 141c can be used as a reference value in both cases of referring to the distribution table and referring to the stop mode table. In this way, it is not necessary to store the reference numerical value for the sorting table and the reference numerical value for the stop mode table separately, so that the storage capacity of the RAM 140 can be saved and the processing executed by the MPU 102 can be kept simple. Is possible.

In addition, by providing a stop mode table for each jackpot type, even if the reference numerical value associated with the sorting table is common among a plurality of jackpot types,
It is possible to appropriately obtain the stop mode data. For example, in the sorting table for the first working port 25a shown in FIG. 11A, each reference numerical value from “10” to “14” is associated with the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot. Each reference numerical value from “10” to “14” has a probability variation of 15 in the sorting table for the second working port 25b shown in FIG.
It corresponds to R jackpot (refer to the point that the reference numerical values from “10” to “29” are associated with probability variation 15R jackpot in FIG. 11B). Corresponding to this, in the stop mode table of FIG. 19, the stop mode table for the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot (see FIG. 19C) and the stop mode table for the probability variation 15R jackpot (FIG. 19B). Each reference numerical value from “10” to “14” is set in any stop mode table. Therefore, it is difficult to appropriately obtain stop mode data used for symbol stop display and perform stop display in a predetermined mode only from the reference numerical value. In this regard, if the stop mode table is divided for each jackpot type and the stop mode table to be referred to is determined and then the stop mode table is referred to, the desired stop mode data can be reliably acquired.

In general, when a plurality of operation ports are provided and a sorting table is provided for each operation port, a plurality of jackpot types for the same reference numerical value (reference values from “10” to “14” in the above-described example) as described above. However, even in such a case, if a stop mode table is provided for each jackpot type and a stop mode table to be referenced is determined, stop mode data corresponding to the jackpot type can be reliably acquired. It is. In this way, the range of the reference numerical value is made different among the distribution tables so that a plurality of jackpot types do not correspond to the reference numerical value (for example, “0” to “29” as the reference numerical value in the first operating port 25a). Therefore, it is not necessary to use numerical values from “30” to “59” for the second working port 25b, so that the structure of the sorting table can be kept simple. Furthermore, it is not necessary to provide a jackpot type counter for each sorting table (for each of the plurality of operation ports) due to different reference numerical values for each sorting table, so that the configuration of the main controller 100 can be kept simple. It is.

In the jackpot stop mode setting process of FIG. 18, after determining the jackpot type, the respective jackpot type stop mode tables are referred to as described above (steps S1106, S1110, S1114, and S1118). At this time, stop mode data corresponding to the reference numerical value may be read from the stop mode table and stored in the RAM 140. However, since the stop mode data stores lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs, the data structure is complicated. Or the data size tends to be large. Therefore, in this embodiment, the stop mode data is not read, but the address of the storage area in which the stop mode data is stored is acquired. In this way, since the stop mode data can be easily acquired by accessing the acquired address without storing the stop mode data in the RAM 140, the storage capacity of the RAM 140 can be saved. In addition, since it is not necessary to perform processing for transferring the data in the ROM 110 to the RAM 140, the MPU 102 that controls the ROM 110 and the RAM 140 is used.
It is also possible to reduce the processing burden on the system.

If the address of the stop mode data is acquired with reference to the stop mode table (step S11)
06, step S1110, step S1114, step S1118), this time, a flag for storing the jackpot type is set according to the jackpot type. That is, usually 1
If it is a 5R jackpot, a normal 15R jackpot flag is set (step S1120), and if it is a probability 15R jackpot, a probability variable 15R jackpot flag is set (step S1116).
If the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag is set (step S1
112) If it is an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag is set (step S1106). Thereafter, the address of the stop mode data acquired previously is stored in the RAM 14.
16 (step S1122), the jackpot stop mode setting process is terminated, and FIG.
Return to the variable display start process.

In the variable display start process, when the determination result of whether or not the big hit lottery is a big hit, the above-described stop mode setting process for the big hit is performed. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is wrong (step S1074: No), a stop mode setting process for removal is performed (step S1084).

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a flow of stop mode setting processing for detachment. This process is a process of setting various data relating to the stop display of the symbols in order to stop and display the symbols of the segment type display device 70 in a manner corresponding to the loss in response to the fact that the result of the lottery lottery is missed. . Here, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are two types of “out of normal” and “out of special” as described above with reference to FIG. Corresponding to this, in the stop mode setting process for detachment, it is determined whether it is special detachment or normal detachment, and by setting the data associated with each detachment type, stop display according to the detachment type The aspect of is changed. Whether it is special off or normal off can be determined by referring to the jackpot lottery table, but the jackpot lottery table has a jackpot lottery table for an uncertain change state and a jackpot lottery table for a probability change state (FIG. 10). Therefore, in the outage stop mode setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a certain change state (FIG. 20: Step S11).
40). As described above, whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state can be determined by referring to the “probability variation state flag” in the flag area 143.

In the case of the probability variation state (step S1140: Yes), it may be determined whether or not it is special out by referring to the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state (S1142). As described above, the lottery value and the lottery result are associated with the jackpot lottery table.
By referring to the jackpot lottery table using the value in the 2j jackpot random number storage area as the lottery value, it is possible to determine whether or not it is special. Similarly, in the case of the non-probability change state (step S1140: No), it is determined whether or not it is special out by referring to the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability change state. In the case of special outage (step S1146: Yes), the stop mode table for special outage is referred to (step S1148), and in the case of no special outage (step S1146: No), stop for normal outage The mode table is referred to (step S1150).

FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a stop mode table for special removal and a stop mode table for normal removal. The stop mode table for special removal shown in FIG.
The stop mode table for normal losing shown in) is similar to the above-described stop mode table for jackpot (see FIG. 19), and the stop mode data in which the LED lighting pattern of the segment type display device 70 is set. This is a data table in which reference numerical values are associated with each other. Similarly to the jackpot stop mode table, the stop mode table for special disconnection (the stop mode table for special release and the stop mode table for normal release) is also stored in the stop mode table area 114 of the ROM 110.

Here, whether the special failure or normal failure is determined based on the value of the jackpot random number storage area (the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a), corresponding to this, the stop mode data from the stop mode table for outage Is used as a reference numerical value in the jackpot random number storage area. At this time, “special loss” in the jackpot lottery table (see FIG. 10)
The lottery values associated with the lottery results (“157” and “45 in the example of FIG. 10A)
7 ”,“ 157 ”in the example of FIG. 10B), both of the stop mode tables (
(See FIG. 21 (a)).

In this way, when referring to the stop mode table for special outage when a special outage occurs, the stop mode data corresponding to the reference value can be reliably acquired only by using the numerical value of the jackpot random number storage area as the reference value. Can do. In this way, it is not necessary to separately provide a numerical counter for referring to the stop mode table, so that the storage capacity of the RAM 140 can be saved. In addition, since it is not necessary to frequently switch the counter to be referred to, the program can be kept simple, the capacity of the program area 111 can be saved, and the load on the MPU 102 that executes the program can be reduced. .

Also, with regard to the normal outage stop mode table (see FIG. 21 (b)), the lottery value set in the lottery result of “normal out” in the big hit lottery table is the same as the special outage stop mode table. All you need to do is set. In this way, even in the case of a normal deviation, the stop mode data corresponding to the deviation can be reliably obtained by using the numerical value in the jackpot random number storage area as the reference numerical value.

As described above, the stop mode data can be acquired by referring to the stop mode table. However, in the stop mode setting process for losing in FIG. 20, the stop mode is the same as the stop mode setting process for jackpot described above. Instead of reading the data itself, the address of the storage area where the stop mode data is stored is acquired. Then, in the case of a special outage, after setting a “special outage flag” indicating that it is a special out (FIG. 20: step S1152), the address of the stop mode data is stored in the RAM 140 (step S1154). When the preparation for performing the stop display is completed by performing each of the above processes, the stop mode setting process for removal in FIG.
Return to the variable display start process.

As described above, in the variable display start process of FIG. 16, a big hit stop mode setting process is performed in the case of a big win (step S1082), and a outage stop mode setting process is executed in the case of a big hit ( Step S1084) prepares to execute the stop display in a manner corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery. When the preparation for the stop display is completed in this way, the process of setting the symbol variable display time (FIG. 17: “variable display time setting process” in step S1086) is subsequently executed.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the flow of the variable display time setting process. As shown in the figure, in the variable display time setting process, first, the numerical value of the variable type counter 141d is acquired (step S1180). Since the variation type counter 141d is provided in the counter area 141 of the RAM 140, the MPU 102 can access the RAM 140 and acquire the value of the variation type counter 141d. If the value of the fluctuation type counter 141d is acquired in this way, it is possible to set the fluctuation display time by referring to the “fluctuation display time table” in which the value of the fluctuation type counter 141d and the fluctuation display time are associated with each other. Become.

However, in the bullet ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the reach effect with the effect display device 30 as described above, and in such reach effect, the effect time tends to be longer than the normal effect. . Therefore, when setting the variable display time of the symbols of the segment type display device 70, the reference variable display time table is switched according to whether or not the reach effect is performed (step S1182).

Here, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, non-explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, normal 15R jackpot, probability variation 15R jackpot) and when it is special out Reach production will be performed. As described above, when a big hit or special loss occurs, each flag in the flag area 143 (an implicit certain variation 2R big hit flag, an explicit certain variation 2R big hit flag, a certain variation 15R big hit flag, a normal 15R big hit flag, a special out flag) is set. Therefore, refer to each flag in the flag area 143 to determine whether or not the reach effect is to be performed (refer to the “hit stop mode setting process” in FIG. 18 and the “stop mode setting process for outage” in FIG. 20). It is possible to determine whether.

In addition, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the numerical value of the reach random number storage area of the standby area 142j (the numerical value acquired from the reach random number counter 141e) can be obtained even if it is not such a big hit or special loss. In the case of numerical values, a reach effect is performed. Since the reach random number counter 141e is a counter that takes a random value, if it is determined whether or not to perform the reach effect based on the value of the reach random number counter 141e, it is possible to randomly generate the reach effect. Even if a reach effect is generated randomly even if it is not a big win, it is difficult for a player to be sure that a big win will occur even if a reach effect occurs. Continue to pay attention to the effect display device 30 until it becomes clear. Thereby, it is possible to attract a player's interest to a game.

If it is determined that a reach effect is to be performed (step S1182: Yes), then “
It is determined whether or not “implicit probability change 2R jackpot” or “special loss” (step S1192).
. And, in the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot or special off (step S1192: Ye
s), to obtain the fluctuation display time from the fluctuation display time table for the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot (
Step S1196). On the other hand, when neither the uncertain probability variation 2R jackpot nor the special loss is found (step S1192: No), the variable display time is acquired from the variable display time table for normal reach production (step S1194).

As described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the operation of the large entrance 60 and the operation of the electric accessory 41 are made to be the same or similar in the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot and the case of special outage. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player to the game with the expectation that the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot has occurred even in the case of a special loss. In this regard, in addition to the operation of the large entrance 60 and the operation of the electric accessory 41, if the display time of the variation of the symbol is matched, the bullet ball will be used in the case of the unspecified probability 2R jackpot and in the case of a special loss. The operation of the gaming machine 10 can be made more similar. Therefore, if the same variable display time table (in the example of FIG. 22, the variable display time table for the explicit probability variable 2R jackpot) is referred to in the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot and the case of special loss in this way, it is not explicit. It is possible to easily make the symbol variation time the same in the case of the probability variation 2R jackpot and in the case of special loss.

On the other hand, when the reach effect is not executed (step S1182: No), subsequently, a process of acquiring the number of reservations of the operation port 25 is performed (step S1184). In other words, if there are a large number of holds, there are enough holds or you cannot increase the number of holds beyond the upper limit,
A player may stop firing a game ball. From this point of view, it is desirable to quickly digest the suspension when the number of suspensions is large. Therefore, in the variable display time setting process, the number of holds is acquired in order to appropriately set the variable display time according to the number of holds. As described above, the hold number is the total hold number storage area 142i or the hold number storage area 142a of the hold storage area 142.
Or by accessing the reserved number storage area 142e.

Once the number of holds is obtained, it is then determined whether or not the high support mode is being executed (
Step S1186). As described above, the high support mode is an operation mode in which the electric accessory 41 opens and closes in a manner that allows easy entry of the game ball. Therefore, in the high support mode, the game ball enters the second operation port 25b. It is easy to accumulate hold. Therefore, a variable display time table for the high support mode is prepared, and the high support mode is being executed (step S1186: Y
es), referring to the variable display time table for the high support mode (step S1190).
. In this way, by setting the variable display time of the variable display time table for the high support mode to a short time, it becomes possible to quickly digest the stored suspension. This
In the high support mode, game balls frequently enter the second operating port 25b and the symbol variation display is completed in a short time. A certain game can be enjoyed.

On the other hand, when the mode is not the high support mode (step S1186: No), the variable display time may be acquired from the variable display time table for the low support mode (step S1188).
). In this way, the variable display time table to be referred to is determined according to whether or not the reach effect is present and whether or not the high support mode is set. Remember. When acquiring the variable display time from the variable display time table, based on the number of holds acquired in step S1184,
Determine the variable display time to be acquired. For example, the variable display time table may be set in association with the hold number and the variable display time, and the variable display time corresponding to the hold number may be acquired. By doing so, it is possible to set an appropriate variable display time according to the number of holds.

When the symbol variation display time is set by the above processes, the variation display time setting processing in FIG. 22 is terminated, and the processing returns to the variation display start processing in FIGS. Note that the variable display time acquired from the variable display time table may be stored in the general-purpose area 146 of the RAM 140 or stored in a counter in the MPU 102. As will be described later, when the symbol variation display is started, the elapsed time is counted, but if the obtained variation display time is stored in the counter in the MPU 102, the counter is counted down at a predetermined pace and the counter is counted. It is preferable that the change display time can be easily detected by detecting that “0” becomes “0”.

After returning to the variable display start process of FIGS. 16 to 17 (FIG. 17: Step S1086)
Then, in order to notify the sub-control device 200 that the symbol variation display is to be executed, the “variation start command” and the “game result command” are stored in the command buffer 145 described above (step S1088). The change start command includes information on the previously set change display time and information on the presence / absence of reach production, and the sub-control device 200 receives the change start command, whereby the symbol on the segment type display device 70 is displayed. The effect display device 30 can display the effect symbols in a variable manner or perform a reach effect in accordance with the change display time. Further, the game result command includes information on the result of the game times related to the current variation display. For example, various types of information regarding the results of the jackpot lottery (such as types of jackpots and types of misses) are included, and the sub-control device 20 receives the game result command.
0 can execute various effects according to the result of the jackpot lottery, the type of jackpot or the type of loss. Note that these commands stored in the command buffer 145 are stored in the sub-control device 200 during the external output process (FIG. 13: step S1000) as described above.
Sent to.

When the command is stored in the command buffer 145, preparation for executing the symbol variation display is completed, and the variation display is actually started (step S1090). As a result, since the variable display of symbols is started on the segment type display device 70, the variable display start processing of FIGS. )
.

In addition, in the segment type display device 70 of the present embodiment, there are provided three display units, that is, a left display unit 72, a central display unit 74, and a right display unit 76. What is necessary is just to determine the display part which performs a variable display according to whether the opportunity of a variable display is the entrance to the 1st operation port 25a, or the entrance to the 2nd operation port 25b. In the present embodiment, when the variable display is performed when the ball enters the first operating port 25a, the central display unit 74 displays the variable, and the variable image is displayed when the ball enters the second operating port 25b. When performing, the right display part 76 shall carry out a variable display.

In the symbol game process of FIG. 14, when the symbol variation display is not performed (step S1).
032: No), the variable display preparation process and the variable display start process described above are executed to start the variable display of symbols. On the other hand, when the symbol variation display is being executed (step S
1032: Yes), in order to continue the variable display of the symbols until the variable display time elapses, a “variable display continuation process” described below is executed (step S1040).

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the flow of the variable display continuation process. As shown in the figure, in the variable display continuation process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step S1210). Whether or not the variable display time has passed can be determined by various methods,
In brief, the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is measured using a timer circuit or the like provided in the main control device 100, and the variable display set by the above-described variable display time setting process (see FIG. 22). What is necessary is just to judge by comparing with time. Alternatively, it is also possible to determine whether or not the variable display time has elapsed by counting the clock pulses of the MPU 102. For example, the counter is counted up every time a predetermined number of clock pulses are counted, and when the counter value reaches a predetermined value corresponding to the variable display time, an interrupt is generated and the variable display time has elapsed. A flag indicating this is set by interrupt processing. By examining whether or not this flag is set, it can be determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed. In general, since a clock pulse has an accurate time period, it is possible to accurately detect the elapse of the fluctuation display time by counting the clock pulse.

Alternatively, it is possible to detect the passage of the variable display time by counting the number of loops of the main loop process (see FIG. 13). That is, as described above, since the main loop process is repeatedly executed every 4 msec, the elapsed time can be estimated from the number of repetitions (the number of loops). If it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed by counting the number of loops in this way, it is not necessary to provide a separate timer circuit or the like, so that the device configuration of the main control device 100 can be kept simple. It is. Furthermore, it is possible to measure time by updating a counter when a timer interrupt process described later is executed. Since the timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined time period, if the counter is updated when the timer interrupt process is executed, the value of the counter corresponds to the elapsed time. Such a case is also preferable because it is not necessary to separately provide a timer circuit or the like.

When the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1210 in FIG. 23: No), the lighting pattern of the LED of the segment type display device 70 is changed (S1212). As previously mentioned,
Since the symbol game process is repeatedly executed every 4 msec (see FIG. 13), the variable display continuation process executed in the symbol game process is also repeatedly executed every 4 msec. Therefore, if the LED lighting pattern is changed during the variable display continuation process, the LED lighting pattern can be repeatedly changed until the variable display time elapses. However, LE
If the lighting pattern of D is changed at intervals of 4 msec, the change interval is too short, so in practice, it may be updated at intervals of about 0.1 seconds. For example, if the LED lighting pattern is changed when the variable display continuation process is repeated 25 times, the LED lighting pattern can be changed at intervals of 0.1 seconds. Thus, by repeatedly changing the lighting pattern of the LED of the segment type display device 70 at a fast cycle, it becomes possible to execute the variable display of symbols on the segment type display device 70.

If the variable display time elapses while the LED lighting pattern of the segment type display device 70 is repeatedly changed, it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed in step S1210 (step S1210: Yes). The “variable display end process” of S1214 is executed.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the flow of the variable display end process. This process is a process in which when the variable display time of the symbol of the segment type display device 70 elapses, the segment type display device 70 displays the stop of the symbol. As shown in the figure, when the process is started, first, stop mode data in which the symbol stop mode is set (see FIGS. 19 and 21).
In order to acquire the address of the stop mode data acquired in the stop mode setting process described above (FIG. 1).
8 (see step S1122 in FIG. 8 and step S1154 in FIG. 20) is read from the RAM 140 (step S1230). Next, based on the acquired address, the ROM 110
Stop mode data is acquired from the table area 113 (step S1232).

As described above, since the LED display pattern of the segment type display device 70 is set in the stop mode data (see FIG. 19 or FIG. 20), the LED may be turned on according to the set display pattern. . Although two display patterns of “display pattern 1” and “display pattern 2” are set in the stop mode data, “display pattern 2” may be used for the stop display of symbols. In addition, as described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the central display unit 74 performs a variable display triggered by entering the first operating port 25a, and enters the second operating port 25b. The right display unit 76 performs a change display as an opportunity. Correspondingly, in the case of variable display triggered by entering the first working port 25a, the central display unit 74 displays a stop of the symbol,
In the case of a variable display triggered by entering the operation port 25b, the right display unit 76 may perform a stop display of the symbol. Therefore, when the stop mode data is acquired (step S1232), by referring to the variable display target flag in order to determine which of the central display unit 74 and the right display unit 76 performs the stop display, It is specified which variation opening of the symbol currently being executed is a variation display triggered by the entry of a ball into any of the operating ports (step S1234).

When the target of the fluctuation display is to enter the second working port 25b (step S1236: Yes),
Since the change display of the symbol is performed on the right display unit 76, the symbol display is stopped on the right display unit 76 correspondingly (step S1240). At this time, stop mode data display pattern 2
By turning on each LED of the right display unit 76 according to the above, it is possible to perform stop display in a mode set in the stop mode data. On the other hand, when entering the first operating port 25a instead of entering the second operating port 25b, the central display unit corresponds to the fact that the symbol change display is performed on the central display unit 74. In 74, the symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1238). Also at this time, it is possible to perform stop display in a mode set in the stop mode data by lighting each LED of the central display unit 74 according to the stop mode data. When the symbol display is terminated by performing the stop display in the segment type display device 70 in this way, the variation display end process of FIG. 24 is terminated and the process returns to the variation display continuation process of FIG. ). After returning to the variation display continuation process, a “variation end command” for notifying the sub-control device 200 that the symbol variation display has been completed is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1216). Thereafter, the variation display continuation process is terminated, and the process returns to the symbol game process of FIG. 14 (see step S1040 of FIG. 14).

As described above, in the symbol game process, various processes related to the determination of whether or not the big hit lottery is made and the symbol variation display and stop display are executed. And if you execute the symbol display,
When the success / failure result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the jackpot. When a big hit occurs in this way, a “game state transition process” (FIG. 13: step S100) executed after the symbol game process in the main loop process (see FIG. 13).
According to 8), the gaming state of the ball game machine 10 is shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the flow of the game state transition process. As shown in the figure, in the game state transition process, first, it is determined whether or not the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 is being executed (step S1260). That is, since the game state transition process is repeatedly executed within the main loop process of FIG. 13, there is a case where the game state transition process has already been performed and the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 has been executed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the open / close mode is being executed, and only when the open / close mode is not being executed, processing for starting the open / close mode is performed. As will be described later, in the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, since the “open / close mode flag” is set when the open / close mode is started, whether the open / close mode is being executed by referring to this open / close mode flag. It is possible to determine whether or not.

If the open / close mode is not being executed (step S1260: NO), it is first determined whether or not the symbol variable display of the segment type display device 70 has been completed (step S1262).
As described above, the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is started after the symbol variation display is finished and the symbol is stopped and displayed. When the symbol variation display is not terminated, the opening / closing mode is started. The game state transition process is terminated without any processing (step S1262: No). If the variable display has been completed (step S1262: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the open / close mode is actually started (step S1264).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode of the big entrance 60 is executed when the result of the big win lottery is a big hit (usually 15R big win, probability variation 15R big hit, unspecified probability variation 2R big hit, explicit probability variation 2R big hit) This is the case and special off-line case. Therefore, it may be determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery corresponds to these. As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, a flag corresponding to each jackpot type (usually 15
R jackpot flag, probability variation 15R jackpot flag, non-explicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag, explicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag) are set (refer to “Big jackpot stop mode setting process” in FIG. 18), and by referring to these flags It is possible to examine the results of the jackpot lottery. Similarly, in the case of a special outage, a special outage flag is set (see step S1152 in FIG. 20), so it is possible to determine whether or not a special outage has occurred by referring to the special outage flag.

When it is determined that the open / close mode is to be started (step S1264 in FIG. 25: Yes), the open / close mode start process of step S1266 is executed. In this processing, the above-described opening / closing mode flag is set. Also, in the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, even if the open / close mode is started, when the big hit or special loss occurs, the large entrance 60 is not immediately started to open / close, but waits for a predetermined time. After that, the opening / closing operation starts. Therefore, in order to detect the lapse of the standby time, the standby time is set in the timer of the MPU 102. As described above, if a predetermined waiting time (opening time) is provided before the opening / closing of the large entrance 60 is started, the large entrance 60
Before starting the opening and closing of the stage, the effect that informs the player that the opening and closing of the large entrance 60 will start (
Opening production) can be performed. This makes it possible to further enhance the interest of the jackpot game and the like. In addition, if a waiting time is provided, the actual opening / closing operation can be started after the preparation process for executing the opening / closing mode has been completed with certainty, so the opening / closing operation is started in an incomplete state. It is possible to avoid the situation and appropriately execute the open / close mode. For example, the sub-control device 200 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 30 in accordance with the open / close mode. Since such an effect image has a large data size, it takes time to read from the ROM in the sub-control device 200. Sometimes. Even in these cases,
By providing the standby time, it is possible to appropriately display the effect image in accordance with the start of the open / close mode.

The opening time is stored in advance in the ROM 110, and can be read from the ROM 110 and set in the timer. In this embodiment, when the open / close mode is executed in the high-frequency entry mode (usually in the case of 15R jackpot or probability variation 15R jackpot), the opening time is set to “1 second”. On the other hand, in the low-frequency entry mode (in the case of non-explicit probability change 2R big hit, explicit probability change 2R big hit, special outage), it is set to “0.2 seconds” shorter than in the high-frequency entry mode. As will be described later, in the low-frequency entry mode, the opening / closing operation of the large entrance 60 is performed quickly and the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 is completed quickly. If this is done, a series of games from the start to the end of the open / close mode can be progressed at a good tempo. As a result, it is possible to give the player a refreshing feeling.

Although various timers can be used as timers for measuring the passage of time, in this embodiment, a countdown timer that measures time by counting down a numerical value set in a counter at a constant time interval. Is used. The countdown timer is provided in the main control device 100. The countdown timer measures the elapsed time by repeatedly counting down the numerical value of the counter at a constant time interval, and detects that the value of the counter has become “0”. It is possible to detect that the time set in the counter has elapsed.

When the opening / closing mode start process is executed (step S1266), the LED of the left display unit 72 of the segment type display device 70 is then turned on according to the stop mode data in the stop mode table. That is, as described above, the stop mode data in the stop mode table includes the central display unit 7.
4 and the display pattern (display pattern 2) used for display on the right display unit 76, the left display unit 7
Since the display pattern (display pattern 1) used for the display of 2 is set, the LED of the left display section 72 is turned on according to this display pattern 1. As described above, in the jackpot stop mode data, the display pattern 1 corresponds to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (see FIG. 19). The left display part 72 can be used as a round number display part.

In the subsequent step S1270, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is 15R jackpot (usually 15R jackpot or probability variation 15R jackpot). Such a determination can usually be made by referring to the 15R jackpot flag or the probability variation 15R jackpot flag. In the case of 15R jackpot (step S1270: Yes), “15” is set in the remaining round counter 141g that counts the remaining number of times (number of rounds) to open the big entrance 60 (step S).
1274). On the other hand, if it is not a 15R jackpot (step S1270: No), since it corresponds to the type of opening the big entrance 60 twice, such as an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, an explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, or a special loss, the remaining round counter 141g is set to “2” (step S1
272).

After the round remaining number counter 141g is set, an “opening start command” is stored in the command buffer 145 in order to notify the sub-control device 200 that the open / close mode is started and the opening time is reached. The opening start command stored in the command buffer 145 is transmitted to the sub-control device 200 by the external output process (FIG. 13: step S1000) described above, and the sub-control device 200 receives this and synchronizes with the start of the open / close mode. It is possible to excite the game by executing various effects processing. In addition, the opening start command can include information for notifying whether the opening / closing mode to be started is the low-frequency entry mode or the high-frequency entry mode. In 200, it is possible to determine the content of the effect based on the type of the open / close mode, such as switching the content of the effect according to the low frequency entrance mode or the high frequency entrance mode.

When the opening start command is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S127)
6) Next, in order to output various information related to the start of the open / close mode to the outside, various signals are output to the external output terminal 910 (step S1278). For example, each flag indicating the type of jackpot (usually 15R jackpot flag, probability variation 15R jackpot flag, implicit probability variation 2
Referring to (R jackpot flag, explicit probability change 2R jackpot flag), if any of the flags is set, the voltage of the terminal that reports that a jackpot has occurred is set to a high level. By doing so, the hall computer connected to the external output terminal 910 can recognize that the jackpot has occurred. Of course, as described above, a signal may be output even in the case of extraordinary loss, or a signal notifying not only of the big hit but also the type of the big hit may be output.

When the execution of the open / close mode is started by the above process, when the game state transition process is called again in the main loop process of FIG. 13, it is determined that the open / close mode is being executed in step S1260 of FIG. (S1260: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1280. In step S1280, by referring to the previously set countdown timer,
It is determined whether or not the opening time set previously has ended. If the opening time has not ended (step S1280: No), in order to wait until the opening time ends, the game state transition process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the main loop process (see FIG. 13). In this manner, in step S1280, “
By determining “No” and returning to the main loop processing, it is possible to wait for the opening / closing operation of the large entrance 60 until the opening time ends. If the opening time ends while waiting while repeating the determination in step S1280, this time step S1280 is performed.
If “Yes” is determined in 1280, the process proceeds to “large entrance opening / closing process” in step S1282.

26 and 27 are flowcharts showing the flow of the large entrance opening / closing process. This process is a process of actually opening and closing the large entrance 60 upon completion of the opening time. When the large entrance opening / closing process is started, it is first determined whether or not the large entrance 60 is in an open state, and the process is branched depending on whether or not it is open (step S1310). Large entrance 60
Is not being released (step S1310: No), then the remaining round counter 1
It is confirmed whether 41g is "0" (step S1312). Round remaining number counter 141
When g is “0” (step S1312: Yes), all the rounds have been digested, and it is not necessary to open the large entrance 60. 2
The process returns to the game state transition process 5.

On the other hand, when the remaining round counter 141g is not “0”, it is subsequently determined whether or not the countdown timer is “0” (step S1314), and the countdown timer is “0”.
If not, the large entrance opening / closing process is terminated as it is (step S1314: No). That is, as will be described later, the countdown timer is set when the large entrance 60 is closed because the time for closing the large entrance 60 (closed time) is set to “0”. (Until the closing time set in the countdown timer elapses)
Ends the processing without opening the large entrance 60. By doing so, it is possible to repeat the opening / closing operation of the large entrance 60 at appropriate time intervals while keeping the large entrance 60 in the closed state until the set closing time elapses.

When the countdown timer is “0” (step S1314: Yes), since the predetermined time (set closing time) has elapsed after the large entrance 60 is closed, the large entrance 60 is opened. The “large entrance opening process” is performed (step S1316). In such a process, the large entrance opening driving section 62 is driven to open the large entrance opening 60 by transmitting a drive signal to the large entrance opening driving section 62 connected to the main control device 100.

Even when the large entrance 60 is thus opened, as described above, if a predetermined number of game balls enter the large entrance 60 or if a predetermined time has elapsed after the release, Entrance 60
Must be returned to its original closed state. Therefore, when the large entrance 60 is opened, subsequently, “condition counter setting process at opening” in step S1318 to set various counters used for determining whether to return from the opened state to the closed state. Execute.

FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of condition counter setting processing at the time of opening. In this process, first, it is determined whether the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is executed in the high frequency entrance mode or the low frequency entrance mode (S1360). That is, in the high-frequency entry mode and the low-frequency entry mode, the time until the large entrance 60 is closed (opening time) as described above.
However, such a difference can be caused by setting different conditions for returning the large entrance 60 to the closed state. Therefore, the process is branched depending on whether the open / close mode to be executed is the high-frequency entry mode or the low-frequency entry mode, and different conditions are set for each mode. As described above, in this embodiment, normally 15R jackpot or probability variation 1
In the case of 5R jackpot, the high-frequency entry mode is executed, and in the case of non-explicit probability change 2R jackpot, explicit probability change 2R jackpot or special outage, the low-frequency entry mode is executed. Therefore, in step S1360, by referring to the flags corresponding to each jackpot type (usually 15R jackpot flag, probability variation 15R jackpot flag, implicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag, explicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag) and special outlier flags, It may be determined whether or not to execute the entry mode.

When the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 is executed in the high frequency entrance mode (step S1360:
Yes), the aforementioned countdown timer is set to “30 seconds” (step S1362).
). On the other hand, when executing in the low-frequency entry mode (step S1360: No), the countdown timer is set to “0.2 seconds” (step S1366). In this way, in the high-frequency entry mode, the large entrance 6 over a longer time than in the low-frequency entry mode.
Since 0 can be set in the open state, the open / close mode can be executed in such a manner that the game ball can easily enter.

In the case of the high-frequency entry mode, “10” is set in the remaining entry counter (step S1364). As will be described later, the remaining number counter is 1 when there is an entrance to the large entrance 60.
Since the countdown is performed one by one, when the set number of game balls enter, the remaining number counter remains “0”. As a result, it is possible to detect that there has been a set number of balls. On the other hand, in the low-frequency entry mode, the numerical value of the remaining entry counter is set to “6” by making it smaller than that in the high-frequency entry mode (step S1368). In this way, in the low frequency entry mode, the large entrance 60 can be closed with a smaller number of entries than in the high frequency entry mode. The number of winning balls paid out for entering the entrance 60 can be reduced as compared with the high-frequency entry mode.

When the condition counter setting process in FIG. 28 is finished and the large entrance opening / closing process in FIG. 26 is resumed (step S1318), this time, the sub control device 200 indicates that the large entrance 60 has been opened.
Is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1320). The large entrance opening command includes information on whether the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 is the high frequency entrance mode or the low frequency entrance mode. By transmitting to the sub-control device 200, the sub-control device 200 can grasp whether the open / close mode is the high-frequency entry mode or the low-frequency entry mode, and can execute an effect corresponding to each mode. It becomes.

When the large entrance opening / closing process of FIG. 26 is thus completed, the process returns to the gaming state transition process of FIG.
After performing each process of 1292, the process returns to the main loop process of FIG. Since each process is repeatedly executed in the main loop process as shown in FIG. 13, the game state transition process in FIG. 25 is executed again after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the large entrance opening / closing is performed in step S1282. The process is executed again. Then, since the large entrance 60 is now open, “Yes” is determined in step S1310 (see FIG. 26) of the large entrance opening / closing process, and the process proceeds to step S1322 in FIG.

In the state shifted to step S1322, as described above, the large entrance 60 is in an open state, so it is determined whether or not the large entrance 60 is closed this time. First, it is determined whether or not the countdown timer is “0” (step S1322). As described above, since the time (opening time) for maintaining the large entrance 60 in the open state is set in the countdown timer (see steps S1362 and S1366 in FIG. 28), the countdown timer is “0”. In that case, it can be determined that the opening time has elapsed. Therefore, when the countdown timer is “0” (step S1322: Yes), in order to close the large entrance 60,
The “large entrance opening closing process” of step S1330 is executed. In such a large entrance closing process,
By transmitting a drive signal to the large entrance opening driving section 62, the large entrance opening driving section 62 is driven and the large entrance 60 is closed.

On the other hand, when the countdown timer is not “0”, since the opening time has not yet elapsed, it is not necessary to close the large entrance 60 immediately. However, even if the opening time has not elapsed, when a predetermined number of game balls enter the large entrance 60, the large entrance 60 may be closed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the countdown timer is not “0” (step S1322: No), it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering the large entrance 60 (step S).
1324) If there is an incoming ball, the remaining ball counter is counted down (step S1326). As a result of counting down the remaining ball counter, the remaining ball counter is “0”.
If it becomes (step S1328: Yes), it means that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the large entrance 60, so that the large entrance is closed to close the large entrance 60. The process is executed (step S1330). When the remaining number counter is not “0” (step S13)
28: No), since the predetermined number of balls has not been reached, the large ball opening / closing process may be terminated without closing the large ball opening 60. If there is no entry to the big entrance 60 (
In step S1324: No), it is only necessary to end the large entrance closing process without counting down the remaining entrance counter. The presence or absence of a ball entering the large ball opening 60 can be determined by the main control device 100 reading out the detection state of the sensor 60s provided in the large ball port 60.

When the remaining ball counter is “0” (step S1328: Yes), the large ball opening 60 is closed by closing the large ball opening 60 (step S1330) and the large ball opening 60 is closed. Because one round is completed by the above, from the remaining round counter 141g "
1 "is subtracted (step S1332). Next, in order to determine whether or not the predetermined number of rounds has been completed, it is determined whether or not the remaining round counter is “0” (step S1334).
). If the remaining round counter is not “0” (step S1334: No), the round still remains, so it is necessary to open the large entrance 60 again. Therefore, in order to set various counters used when the large entrance 60 is opened again, step S1 is set.
336 “condition counter setting process at closing” is executed.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a flow of condition counter setting processing at the time of closing. In this process, similar to the above-described “opening condition counter setting process”, the process branches depending on whether or not the high-frequency entry mode is set, and the condition for shifting to the open state is set for each mode. In the case of the high-frequency entry mode (step S1380: Yes), the countdown timer is set to “2”.
Seconds "(step S1382). In this way, when 2 seconds elapse after setting the countdown timer, step S131 of the large entrance opening / closing process (see FIG. 26).
4 is determined as “Yes”, and as a result, the large entrance 60 is opened (
Step S1316). Thus, the large entrance 60 can be kept closed until a predetermined closing time (2 seconds in this example) elapses, and the large entrance 60 can be shifted to an open state after the closing time has elapsed. It becomes.

On the other hand, in the case of the low-frequency entry mode (step S1380: No in FIG. 29), the countdown timer is set to “0.2 seconds”. By doing so, the large entrance 60 can be opened as soon as a short time has passed since the large entrance 60 was closed. Further, as described above, in the low-frequency entry mode, even if the large entrance 60 is opened, the large entrance 60 is closed immediately (in step S1336 of the open condition counter setting process in FIG. 28). (See that the countdown timer is set to “0.2 seconds”). Therefore, in the low-frequency entry mode, the opening and closing of the large entrance 60 are repeated in a short time, and all rounds are completed quickly. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game with a sense of speed or to end the open / close mode without the player noticing that the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 has been executed.
As described above, in the case of the unspecified probability variation 2R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the transition to the probability variation state is made after the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is finished, so that the transition to the probability variation state is realized without the player being aware of this. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by giving the player the surprise that a big hit is likely to occur soon.

In order to make it difficult for the player to notice that the open / close mode has been executed, the large entrance 60
It is sufficient that the opening time is short, and the closing time is not necessarily short. That is, it is difficult for the player to notice that the large entrance 60 is opening and closing even when the large entrance 60 is closed. Therefore, it is not always necessary to set the closing time short. of course,
The closing time may be set short. In such a case, the entire opening / closing mode is quickly completed, so that the opening / closing mode can be executed in a manner that is hardly noticed by the player. These closing time and opening time may be stored in advance in the ROM 110, read out from the ROM 110, and set in the countdown timer.

When the closing time is set in the countdown timer (step S1382 or step S1384 in FIG. 29), the condition counter setting process at the time of closing is terminated and the large entrance opening closing process in FIG. 27 is resumed (see step S1336 in FIG. 27). ). Next, in order to notify the sub control device 200 that the large entrance 60 has been closed, a “large entrance close command” is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1338). The large entrance closing command includes information on whether the open / close mode is the high frequency entrance mode or the low frequency entrance mode, and the sub-control device 200 receives the large entrance exit command. Thus, it is possible to execute effects corresponding to the respective modes.

On the other hand, when the remaining round counter is “0” (step S1334: Yes), an ending start process is executed (step S1340). That is, it is possible to end the open / close mode since all rounds have ended, but in this embodiment, the open / close mode is not immediately ended after the end of all rounds, but a predetermined time (ending time) is set. After the elapse, the open / close mode is terminated. Therefore, in step S1340, processing for setting such an ending time in the countdown timer is performed. Ending time is ROM11
It may be stored in advance in 0, read from the ROM 110, and set in the countdown timer. In this way, when the ending time elapses, the countdown timer becomes “0”, so that the ending time elapse can be detected.

When such an ending time is provided, various effects can be performed during the ending time. For example, if the player enters the probability change state after the open / close mode ends, it is possible to notify the player of the fact that it will change to the probability change state, or the player aims to win a big hit again. It is also possible to perform various effects that excite the game so as to continue the game. Therefore, when the ending start process is executed (step S13).
40) In order to notify the sub-control device 200 that the ending time has started, an “ending start command” is set in the command buffer 145 (step S1342).
. Such an ending start command includes information on whether the open / close mode is the high-frequency entry mode or the low-frequency entry mode, and the sub-control device 200 receives the ending start command to determine whether the high-frequency entry mode is selected. An effect mode can be determined according to the low-frequency entry mode. Similarly to the other commands, the ending start command is transmitted to the sub-control device 200 by the external output process (FIG. 13: step S1000) in the main loop process, so the sub-control device 200 is synchronized with the start of the ending time. It is possible to start production.

In this embodiment, “1 second” is set in the countdown timer in the case of the high-frequency entry mode, and “0.2 seconds” is set in the case of the low-frequency entry mode. As described above, in the case of the low-frequency entry mode, the large entrance 60 is opened and closed in a short time. The operation can be performed quickly. By doing so, it becomes possible to advance the game at a good tempo and enhance the exhilaration of the game.

As described above, in the large entrance opening / closing process, the large entrance 60 is opened and closed to digest the round, and when all the rounds are digested, the ending time is set to the countdown timer. When the large entrance opening / closing process is completed, the process returns to the gaming state transition process of FIG. 25 (see step S1282 of FIG. 25).

After returning to the gaming state transition process, it is then determined by referring to the remaining round counter 141g whether or not all rounds have been completed (step S1284). If the remaining round counter 141g is “0” (step S1284: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by referring to the countdown timer (
Step S1286). If all rounds are over and the ending time is over (
In step S1286: Yes, an “open / close mode end transition process” (step S1288) or an open / close mode end process (step S1292), which will be described later, is executed to end the open / close mode. On the other hand, all rounds have not ended (step S1284: No)
When the ending time has not ended (step S1286: No), the open / close mode is continued, so that the gaming state transition process is ended as it is.

FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 are flowcharts showing the flow of the transition process at the end of the open / close mode. This process is a process of shifting the gaming state to various states with the end of the open / close mode of the large entrance 60. In the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, after the end of the ending time (
By executing such processing immediately before ending the open / close mode (step S in FIG. 25).
1288), it is possible to reliably shift the gaming state to a predetermined state after the end of the open / close mode.

As described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state after the opening / closing mode ends differs depending on the type of jackpot or the type of loss. Therefore, in the transition process at the end of the open / close mode, the process is branched according to the type of jackpot. First, it is determined whether the probability variation 15R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1400), and the probability variation 15R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2 is determined.
In the case of R jackpot (step S1400: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1406.
Whether the probability variation 15R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot can be determined by referring to the probability variation 15R jackpot flag or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag.

In the case of the probability variation 15R jackpot and the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, as described above,
After the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is finished, the state is changed to the probability changing state, and the support mode of the electric accessory 41 is started to be executed in the high support mode. Corresponding to this, in the case of the probability variation 15R jackpot and the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the probability variation state flag is set (step S1408) and the high support mode flag is set (S1410). By doing so, it is possible to shift to the probability change state and to start executing the high support mode. In addition, before setting each flag, various flags (opening / closing mode flag, probability change state flag, high support mode flag) for identifying the gaming state are once reset (flag reset processing in step S1406). By doing this, it is possible to reliably set only the target flag.

It should be noted that the state in which the probability change state and the high support mode are being executed is the second operation port 2.
This is a very advantageous state for the player because it is easy to enter the ball in 5b and a big hit is likely to occur. For this reason, in this embodiment, the gaming state in the probability variation state and the high support mode is referred to as a “special advantageous state”.

In the case of probability variation 15R jackpot or in the case of implicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1400)
: Yes), in response to the start of such a special advantageous state, the probability variation state flag and the high support mode flag are set (step S1408, step S1410), and then a “special advantageous state start command” is stored in the command buffer 145. Set (Step S1
412). The special advantageous state start command is transmitted to the sub-control device 200 by the external output process (FIG. 13: step S1000) of the main loop process, as with other various commands. By receiving this, the sub-control device 200 can grasp that the special advantageous state has started and execute various effects such as effects that excite the special advantageous state.

On the other hand, if it is not the probability variation 15R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S140).
0: No), then, it is determined whether or not the uncertain probability variation 2 big hit (step S1402).
That is, even if it is not the probability variation 15R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, in the case of the non-explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state after the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is ended. For this reason, it is determined whether or not the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, and if it is the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1402: Yes), the process branches to step S1404. Note that it is possible to determine whether or not the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot is made by referring to the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag.

Here, the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot is different from the probability variation 15R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot in that the high support mode is not started even when the open / close mode ends. However, if the high support mode has been executed before winning the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the high support mode may be continued as it is. Therefore, in step S1404, it is determined whether or not the high support mode flag is set. If the high support mode flag is set (step S1404: Yes), similarly to the probability variation 15R jackpot and the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, The probability variation state flag is set (step S1408), and the high support mode flag is set (step S1410). Further, the special advantageous state start command is stored in the command buffer (step S1412).

On the other hand, when the high support mode flag is not set (the high support mode is not executed) (step S1404: No), only the probability change state flag is set (step S1416). In this way, when the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot occurs,
Is driven in the high support mode, the high support mode is continued as it is. If the high support mode is not executed, the state in which the high support mode is not executed continues. As a result, as described above, the player is informed of the fact that the unspecified probability variation 2R jackpot has been won.
It becomes difficult to notice by 1 and it is possible to give the player a more certain surprise that the state has shifted to a certain change state.

If the high support mode flag is not set (step S1404:
No), the special advantageous state is not started because only the probability variation state flag is set and the high support mode flag is not set. Corresponding to this, "Special advantageous state termination command"
Is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1418). The sub-control device 200
By receiving such a special advantageous state end command, it is possible to grasp that the special advantageous state does not occur and execute an effect according to a gaming state other than the special advantageous state. In addition, before setting the probability change state flag in step S1416, various flags (open / close mode flag, probability change state flag, high support mode flag) for identifying the gaming state are reset (step S1414). As described above, this makes it possible to reliably set only the probability variation state flag.

If it is not the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1402: No), it is then determined whether or not the normal 15R big hit is made with reference to the normal 15R big hit flag (FIG. 31: step S1420). Usually, in the case of 15R jackpot (step S1420: Yes), after executing the flag reset process (step S1422) as in the case of other jackpot types,
The high support mode flag is set (step S1424). Here, in the case of a normal 15R big hit, the probability variation state flag is not set after the flag reset process, and therefore the probability variation state flag is in the “OFF” state. By doing so, in the case of a normal 15R jackpot, the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 can be ended without shifting the gaming state to the probability changing state. Moreover, even if the gaming state is in a probable change state when a 15R jackpot is generated, it is possible to return to the non-probability change state.

If flag reset processing is performed (step S1422), then a high support mode flag is set (step S1424). Thereby, after the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is finished, the high support mode is started, and it becomes easy for a game ball to enter the second operation opening 25b. Usually, in the case of 15R big hit, since it does not shift to the probability change state after the open / close mode ends, the player's interest in the game tends to decrease when the open / close mode ends.
By shifting to a gaming state where it is easy to enter the operating port 25b, it is possible for the player to be in an advantageous state, so that the player's interest can be avoided and the player's interest can be attracted to the game. It becomes.

When the high support mode flag is set (step S1424), the game remaining number counter is set to “100”. Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, a series of games from entering the operation port to displaying a symbol stop corresponds to “one game time”. Since the game remaining number counter is counted down every time one game is performed, the game remaining number counter is set to “10”.
If it is set to “0”, the game number remaining counter becomes “0” when 100 game times are performed. Therefore, if the high support mode is terminated when the remaining game count counter reaches “0”, the high support mode can be executed only for 100 game times. As described above, since the game entrance 25 to the symbol stop display corresponds to one game time, the high support mode can be continued until there is 100 entrances to the operation opening. Can do.
If the high support mode is continued until there is a predetermined number of balls in this way, a predetermined number of balls can be entered for the player by facilitating the ball entry into the operating port during the high support mode. (And the implementation of a jackpot lottery triggered by entering the ball) can be substantially guaranteed. As a result, the player's interest can be further attracted to the game.

After setting the game remaining number counter (step S1426), the “special advantageous state end command” is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1428). That is,
Usually, in the case of 15R big hit, since it does not shift to the probable change state after the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is finished, it does not become a special advantageous state. Therefore, a special advantageous state end command for notifying the sub-control device 200 that the special advantageous state is not set is set in the command buffer 145.

On the other hand, if it is not normally a big 15R big hit (step S1420: No), it is a case of special failure, so the transition process at the end of the open / close mode is ended without changing the probability change state flag or the high support mode flag. That is, in the case of a special outage, if the gaming state before the special outage occurs is a probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained, and if it is a non-probability variation state, the non-probability variation state is maintained. Similarly, if the mode is the high support mode, the high support mode is maintained. If the mode is not the high support mode, the non-high support mode is maintained.

Here, as described above, in the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, as in the case of special outage, if the high support mode is in effect when the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot occurs, the high support mode is set after the end of the open / close mode. If the high support mode is not executed when the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot occurs, the state in which the high support mode is not executed continues. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the operation of the electric accessory 41 at the end of the open / close mode, the implicit probability change 2
It is difficult to determine whether the R jackpot or the special loss has occurred from the operation of the electric accessory 41. In the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, since the player shifts to the probability variation state after the open / close mode is finished, the player plays the game with the expectation that the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot is won. By making it difficult to distinguish between the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot and the special loss, it is possible to make the player have an expectation that an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot has occurred even in the case of a special loss. In this way, the excitement of the game can be improved by raising the player's expectation.

As described above, in the transition process at the end of the open / close mode, various flags such as a probability change state flag and a high support mode flag are set so as to shift to a predetermined game state corresponding to the type of jackpot after the open / close mode ends. Perform the setting process. When the transition process at the end of the open / close mode is thus completed, the process returns to the gaming state transition process of FIG. 25 (step S1288 of FIG. 25).
See).

After returning to the game state transition process, each process for ending the open / close mode is continued. First, the display of the left display part 72 of the segment type display device 70 is terminated (step S12).
90). As described above, since the symbol corresponding to the number of rounds in the open / close mode is displayed on the left display portion 72 of the segment type display device 70 (see step S1268), the display is ended with the end of the open / close mode. . When the display on the left display unit 72 is finished, finally, an open / close mode end process is executed (step S1292). In this processing, the respective types of jackpot flags (normal 15R jackpot flag, probability variation 15R jackpot flag, explicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag, implicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag) and special loss flags are reset.
When the open / close mode is completed by the above processing, the processing returns to the main loop processing of FIG.

In addition, the display of the left display part 72 of the segment type display device 70 (display corresponding to the number of rounds)
As described above, the display starts when the open / close mode starts (step S1268), and the display ends when the open / close mode ends (step S1290). On the other hand, the stop display of the right display unit 76 and the central display unit 74 (the display unit in which the symbol variation display and the stop display are performed due to the ball entering the operation port) are displayed before the start of the open / close mode. Even if the open / close mode ends, it does not end immediately, but continues to be displayed until the next variation display is started. For this reason, the display of the left display part 72 can be displayed only for a short time compared to the stop display of the central display part 74 and the right display part 76. In particular, in the low-frequency entry mode, since the open / close mode is completed in a short time, the display on the left display unit 72 can be displayed for a shorter time. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the case of special loss and the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot are easily determined based on the display of the left display unit 72.

As described above, in the game state transition process (step S1008) of the main loop process,
The game state is shifted to the open / close mode in response to the occurrence of a jackpot or special loss, and the game state is shifted to the game state corresponding to the type of the jackpot by setting various flags when the open / close mode is ended. . If such a game state transition process is performed, then an “electrical accessory control process” for controlling the operation of the electric accessory 41 is performed (step S1010). In addition, the support mode of the electric accessory 41 described above is realized by driving the electric accessory 41 by the electric accessory control process.

32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the flow of the electric accessory control process. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the “supporting flag” is set (whether or not it is set to “ON”) (step S1440). As will be described later, the supporting flag is a flag that is set when various conditions for starting the support mode are met.
When the supporting flag is set (step S1440: Yes), the support mode is started by executing “electric member opening / closing process” (step S1490) for opening and closing the electric member 41. If the supporting flag is not “ON” (step S
1440: No) Subsequently, each process (steps S1442 to S1450) for confirming various conditions for starting the support mode is sequentially performed.

First, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag is “ON” (step S1444). As described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery with the entry into the through operation port 24 is won (in the case of support winning), the electric accessory 41 is opened. The support winning flag is a flag for storing that the lottery (support lottery) has been won.
The process for setting the support winning flag will be described later.

If the support lottery has not been won, or if the support lottery has not been determined yet, the support winning flag has not been set, so in step S1442 “
It is determined as “No” and the process proceeds to step S1444. In step S1444, it is determined whether or not the countdown timer is “0”. As will be described later, the countdown timer has
The symbol variation display time on the through-segment display device 80 is set. Therefore, in step S1444, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation display time has elapsed. If the countdown timer is not “0” (step S1444: No), since the variable display time has not yet elapsed, the electric accessory control process is terminated without starting the support mode, and the main loop process (FIG. 13). Return to).

In the main loop process, the electric accessory control process is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals (
Until the fluctuation display time elapses, it is determined “No” in step S1444 of the electric accessory control process (see FIG. 32), and the process immediately returns to the main loop process. For this reason, it is possible to wait for the execution of the processing after step S1444 until the variable display time elapses. If the variable display time elapses while waiting in this way, step S1444.
Is determined as “Yes”, and the process proceeds to step S1446.

When the variable display time has elapsed, in response to the variable display time having elapsed, the variable display of the through-segment display device 80 may be terminated and the symbols may be stopped and displayed. However,
In step S1444, the countdown timer is determined to be “0” not only when the variable display time has elapsed. For example, when the symbol variation display is not started in the first place, the countdown timer remains “0”. Alternatively, as described above, since the electric accessory control process is repeatedly executed in the main loop process, it is repeatedly executed not only immediately after the change display time of the symbol has elapsed, but also in this case the countdown timer It remains “0”. Therefore, the countdown timer is “0”.
In the case of (Step S1444: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change display is immediately after (Step S1446). Such a determination can be made by various methods.
What is necessary is just to memorize | store the numerical value of the countdown timer when an electrically-driven accessory control process was performed last time, and to compare with the numerical value of this countdown timer. If the previous value of the countdown timer is a value other than "0" and the current value is "0", the variable display time has not elapsed in the previous time, and the variable display time has elapsed in this time From this, it can be determined that the fluctuation display time has just passed.

Immediately after the end of the variable display (step S1446: Yes), in order to stop the variable display of the through-segment display device 80 and stop the display of the symbol, the stop-segment display device 80 displays a stop symbol. It is displayed (step S1448). At this time, since the support winning flag is OFF (see step S1442), the result of the support lottery corresponding to the symbol variation display that has been executed is out. Therefore, the through segment type display device 80 displays a symbol corresponding to the detachment (a detachment symbol).

If it is not immediately after the end of the variation display (step S1446: No), the variation display is not performed in the first place, or the variation display is performed, but the display is already stopped and displayed immediately after the end of the variation display. Therefore, step S1448 is skipped and step S145 is skipped.
Proceed to zero.

In step S1450, it is determined whether or not the number of hold of the through operation port is “0”. That is, since the variation display of the symbol is completed on the through-segment display device 80, if there is a hold of the through operation port (step S1450: No), if the suspension is digested and the variation display of the symbol is started. Good. On the contrary, if there is no hold (step S1450: Yes), the electric accessory control process may be terminated as it is. Since the information related to the hold of the through operation port is stored in the electric-powered article holding area 144 of the RAM 140, the presence or absence of the holding can be determined by referring to the electric-powered article holding area 144.

When there is a hold of the through operation port (step S1450: Yes), as described above, the hold is digested and the symbol variation display is started, and whether or not the support lottery is determined is determined. If the result of the determination is correct, the electric accessory 41 may be opened. Here, in the present embodiment, when performing such processing, first, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 41 is operated in the high support mode (FIG. 33: step S1452). Then, the process is branched between when operating in the high support mode and when not operating (in the low support mode). By doing so, it becomes possible to provide a difference in the operation mode of the electric accessory 41 between the high support mode and the low support mode. Whether or not to execute in the high support mode is determined by the high support mode flag (step S in FIG.
1410 and step S1424 in FIG. 31).

Here, in this embodiment, when the high support flag is set (step S1452 of FIG. 33: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is being executed (
In step S1454), when the open / close mode is being executed (step S1454: Yes).
The processing is shifted to the processing for the low support mode (processing starting from step S1472). In this way, during the execution of the open / close mode, the operation mode of the electric accessory 41 becomes the low support mode, and entering the second working port 25b is not as easy as in the high support mode. During execution of the open / close mode, a large number of prize balls tend to be paid out because it is easy for game balls to enter the large entrance 60, but in this way, the entrance to the second operating port 25b is more than the high support mode. If it is difficult, it is possible to suppress the payout of prize balls for the entrance to the second operation opening 25b, so that the number of prize balls to be paid out during the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 can be suppressed as a whole. Is possible.

Furthermore, by suppressing the ball entering the second operating port 25b during the open / close mode in this way, it is possible to suppress the number of balls that are played without causing the player to be significantly dissatisfied. That is, since the player tends to focus on the large entrance 60 during the open / close mode of the large entrance 60, it is difficult to notice that the operation mode of the electric accessory 41 has changed. Even if a change in the operation mode of the electric accessory 41 is noticed, a large number of winning balls can be obtained by entering the large entrance 60, so that it can be obtained by entering the second operating port 25b. Even if the number of prize balls is reduced to some extent, there is no change in that a large number of prize balls can be obtained as a whole. For these reasons, it is possible to suppress the number of balls without causing the player to feel frustrated or distrustful.

In addition, not only in the high-frequency entry mode in which entry into the large entrance 60 is easy, but also in the low-frequency entry mode in which entry is difficult, the player is similarly dissatisfied. Without electric accessory 4
It is possible to switch one operation mode to the low support mode. That is, when the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is the low-frequency entry mode, the opening / closing mode itself can be quickly ended because the opening time of the large entrance 60 is short. For this reason, since the high support mode can be resumed immediately upon completion of the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60, the electric accessory 4
It is difficult for the player to notice that the operation mode 1 has become the low support mode. Moreover, even if the player notices, the high support mode is immediately resumed, so that the player rarely feels dissatisfied. For these reasons, even when the operation mode of the large entrance 60 is the low-frequency entry mode, it is possible to switch to the low support mode without causing the player to be dissatisfied.

In addition, regardless of whether or not it is a high support mode when a big hit occurs, if the low support mode is set during the open / close mode of the big entrance 60, it depends on whether or not the high support mode was set when a big hit occurs. The ease of entering the second operating port 25b during the jackpot game does not change greatly. Therefore, there is no significant difference in the number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game depending on whether or not the jackpot is in the high support mode, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the variation in the number of balls to be played for each jackpot game. .

In this embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the high support mode is set (step S1452),
Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the open / close mode (step S1454), but the determination may be performed in the reverse order. That is, it is first determined whether or not it is in the open / close mode. If it is in the open / close mode, processing for the low support mode in step S1472 and subsequent steps is performed. If it is not in the open / close mode, it is next determined whether or not the mode is the high support mode. If the mode is the high support mode, the processing for the high support mode in step S1456 and after is performed. Process for mode. In this way, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not the high support mode is in the open / close mode, the processing load on the MPU 102 in the open / close mode can be reduced. On the contrary, if it is determined first whether or not the mode is the high support mode as shown in FIG. 33, if the mode is not the high support mode (in the case of the low support mode), it is not determined whether or not it is in the open / close mode. Therefore, the MPU 10 is not in the high support mode.
2 can be reduced.

When not in the high support mode and the open / close mode (step S1452: Yes, step S1454: No) and when in the low support mode or the open / close mode (step S1)
452: No or step S1454: Yes), in order to digest the hold and start the symbol change display, first, the value of the electric-powered item holding area 144 is used to determine whether the support lottery is successful or not. A determination is made (step S1456, step S1472). That is, when a game ball enters the through operation port 24, the value of the electric accessory release counter 141f is acquired in the electric accessory holding area 144. Therefore, it is determined whether or not this value corresponds to a predetermined hit value. As a result, whether or not the support lottery is successful is determined. In this embodiment, the electric accessory release counter 14
The value of 1f takes a numerical range from “0” to “249”, of which “0” to “190”
The numerical value in the range up to “” corresponds to the hit value. Therefore, if the value of the electric-powered item holding area 144 is within the range from “0” to “190”, the success / failure determination result is determined as a support lottery (
Support winning).

Note that the probability of winning the support lottery may be different between the high support mode and the low support mode. For example, the support lottery is won in the high support mode with a higher probability than in the low support mode. In this way, in the high support mode, not only can the opening time of the electric accessory 41 be made longer than in the low support mode, but also the frequency with which the electric accessory 41 is opened and closed can be increased. It becomes possible to enter the ball more easily. On the contrary, the winning probability may be set so that the support winning is more likely in the low support mode than in the high support mode. In this way, since the electric accessory 41 opens and closes more frequently in the low support mode than in the high support mode, even if the opening time of the electric accessory 41 is short, the second
It is possible to attract the player to the game by having the player hold the expectation of entering the operation port 25b. Furthermore, since the opening / closing of the electric accessory 41 is caused by the through operation port 24, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the through operation port 24, or to operate the firing handle 11 aiming at the through operation port 24. Become.

If the support lottery determination is performed (step S1456 or step S1472),
Next, in order to start the symbol variation display, the symbol variation display time of the through-segment display device 80 is set in the countdown timer (step S1458 or step S1).
474). In this way, by setting the variable display time of the symbol in the countdown timer,
As described above, by determining whether or not the countdown timer is “0”, it is possible to detect the elapse of the symbol variation display time (see step S1444 and step S1492 in FIG. 32).

In this embodiment, in the high support mode, the symbol variation display time is set to “1.5 seconds” (step S1458). When the symbol display is completed, the electric accessory 41 is opened according to the result of the support lottery. If the symbol variation display time is set to about several seconds in this way, the symbol variation display is displayed for several seconds. After completing the process, the electric accessory 41 can be quickly switched to the open state. As a result, it is possible to give the player an impression that the game progresses at a high tempo and enhance the interest of the game. In addition, since it is after the end of the symbol variation display that the electric accessory 41 is in the open state, if the symbol variation display time is shortened, the electric accessory 41 is frequently opened accordingly. As a result, the ratio of the open state (the ratio of the open time to the sum of the time of the open state and the time of the closed state) can be improved, and the entry into the second working port 25b can be further promoted. . In addition, it is possible to quickly digest the hold for the ball entering the through operation port 24, so that the number of the hold reaches the upper limit and the player enters the through operation port 24, and the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to avoid the possibility of being held.

On the other hand, in the low support mode, the symbol variation display time is set to “29.5 seconds” longer than in the high support mode (step S1474). Thus, if the variable display time is set longer than that in the high support mode, the frequency of the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 41 is lowered by the amount that the variable display of the symbol is performed for a long time. It is possible to achieve a more difficult state than the high support mode. In addition, if the variable display time is lengthened, the ratio of the open state time (the ratio of the open state time to the sum of the open state time and the closed state time) can be reduced. If the time is shortened, the percentage of the open state can be increased, so adjusting the variable display time results in the second
It is possible to adjust the ease of entering the operation port 25b. Therefore, by adjusting the frequency of jackpot lottery due to entering the second operating port 25b and the number of game balls paid out for entering the second operating port 25b. Is also possible. In particular, if the variable display time in the low support mode is set to 20 seconds or longer as in the present embodiment, the second operating port 25
The number of balls that can enter the b is sufficiently suppressed to reduce the number of balls, or the first in low support mode
The jackpot lottery based on the entry into the operating port 25a can be mainly performed.

After the symbol change display time is set in the countdown timer (step S1458 or step S1474), the process is branched depending on whether the result of the support lottery is support winning or not (step S1460 or step S1474). If it is not a support win (step S1460: No, or step S1476: No), the electric accessory 41
Since the opening / closing operation is not performed, the electric accessory control process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main loop process. On the other hand, in the case of support winning (step S1460: Yes or step S1476: Yes), a “support winning flag” is set correspondingly (step S1462 or step S1478).

Next, the number of times the electric accessory 41 is opened is set in the open remaining number counter (step S1464 or step S1480). In this embodiment, “3” is set in the open remaining number counter in the case of the high support mode (step S1464), and “1” which is smaller than in the high support mode is set in the low support mode ( Step S1480). By carrying out like this, since the electric accessory 41 is opened and closed many times in the high support mode than in the low support mode, it is possible to realize a state in which the entry into the second operating port 25b is promoted more than in the low support mode. Is possible. On the other hand, in the low support mode, if the numerical value set in the open balance counter is made small, it is possible to suppress the number of balls to be played by suppressing the number of times that the electric accessory 41 is opened. In particular, if it is set to the smallest “1” as in this embodiment, the player is prevented from being dissatisfied with the fact that the electric accessory 41 is not opened by opening the electric accessory 41. However, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the ball that is caused by the ball entering the second working port 25b. In addition, since it is difficult to enter the second operation port 25b, as described above, it is possible to mainly perform the big win lottery based on the entry to the first operation port 25a in the low support mode. Become.

In the low support mode, if a numerical value is set in the open remaining number counter (step S1480).
), The electric accessory control process of FIGS. 32 to 33 is terminated and the process returns to the main loop process.
On the other hand, in the case of the high support mode, subsequently, it is determined whether or not to reset the high support mode flag, and each process of resetting the high support flag according to the determination result is performed (steps S1466 to S1470). ).

First, in the case of the probability change state (step S1466: No), the electric accessory control process is terminated without resetting the high support mode flag. In this way, in the probability variation state, the high support mode can be maintained as it is without ending. Therefore, in the probability variation state, in addition to the high probability of winning the big hit lottery, the second operating port 25b As a result, it is possible to generate jackpots more easily.

In the case of the non-probability change state (step S1466: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the remaining game times counter is “0”. That is, as described above, in the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment,
Usually, when the 15R jackpot is generated and the mode is shifted to the high support mode (see step S1424 in FIG. 31), the high support mode is maintained until the predetermined number of game times is performed, and the predetermined number of game times are performed. Exit high support mode. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the remaining game number counter is “0” with reference to a remaining game number counter (see step S1426) in which the remaining number of game times for maintaining the high support mode is set. The remaining game counter is
If it is “0” (step S1468: Yes), it means that a predetermined number of game times have been performed, so the high support mode flag is reset (step S1470). On the other hand, if the remaining game number counter is not “0”, the predetermined number of game times have not ended yet, so the electric accessory control process of FIGS. 32 to 33 is performed without resetting the high support mode flag. The process ends (step S1468: No).

In the present embodiment, the high support mode is continued in the case of the probability variation state. However, as in the case of the non-probability variation state described above, the probability variation state is also increased when a predetermined number of game times are performed. The support mode may be ended (the high support mode flag is reset). In such a case, the player tends to play the game while wishing to win the jackpot before the high support mode ends and it becomes difficult to enter, so the player is relieved that the game is in a promising state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the interest in the game is reduced and to attract the player's interest to the game.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when not in the high support mode (step S145).
2: No) and in the open / close mode (step S1454: Yes), each process (step S1472 to step S1480) related to symbol change display and support lottery is shared, but is different in each case. Processing may be performed. For example, the symbol variation time may be different between the case of not being in the high support mode and the case of being in the open / close mode, or the winning probability of the support lottery may be different. In this way, it is possible to vary the frequency of opening and closing of the electric accessory 41 and the time required to open and close the opening of the large entrance 60 during the execution of the opening / closing mode and in the low support mode. It is also possible to vary the frequency of entering the second operation port 25b and the ratio of the frequency of entering the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b between the open / close mode and the low support mode. On the other hand, if the processing is made common as in the present embodiment, the program can be kept simple to save the capacity of the program area 111 of the ROM 110, or the processing load on the MPU 102 that executes the program can be reduced. It is.

When the electric accessory control process ends and the process returns to the main loop process (FIG. 13: Step S10).
10) After the elapse of the predetermined time, the electric accessory control process is executed again. At this time, if the support lottery executed earlier is won and the support winning flag is set (step S in FIG. 33).
1462, step S1478), this time in step S1442 of FIG.
"Yes" is determined, and the process proceeds to step S1492. In step S1492, it is determined whether or not the countdown timer is “0” in order to determine whether or not the symbol variation display time of the through-segment display device 80 has elapsed. If the countdown timer is not “0”, since the fluctuation display time has not yet elapsed, the electric accessory control process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main loop process again (step S1492: No). On the other hand, if the countdown timer is “0” (step S1492: Yes), since the variable display time has elapsed, the symbol of the through-segment display device 80 is stopped and displayed (step S1494).
At this time, since the support lottery is won, the symbol corresponding to the winning symbol (winning symbol)
To stop display.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the “supporting flag” is set in response to the fact that the symbol variation display is finished and the mode is actually shifted to the support mode (step S1496). In addition, the support winning flag is reset instead of the support flag being set (step S1498). When the supporting flag is set in this way, when the electric accessory control process is executed again after returning to the main loop process, in step S1440, “
It is determined as “Yes”, and the process proceeds to “electrical accessory opening / closing process” (step S1490) for actually opening and closing the electric accessory 41.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the flow of the electric accessory opening / closing process. In such a process,
First, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 41 is being opened (step S1500). Although it is possible to determine whether or not the electric accessory 41 is being opened by various methods, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory driving unit 42 that drives the electric accessory 41 (see FIG. 7), the main control device 100 determines whether or not the electric accessory 41 is being opened. Electric character 4
When 1 is being opened (step S1500 in FIG. 34: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the countdown timer is “0” in order to keep the electric accessory 41 open until a predetermined time has elapsed. (Step S1502). That is, as described later, the countdown timer is set with a time (opening time) for maintaining the electric accessory 41 in the open state. Therefore, by checking whether the countdown timer is “0”, the set open time is set. Judge whether or not it has passed.

If the countdown timer is not “0”, since the opening time set in the countdown timer has not yet elapsed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is terminated without closing the electric accessory 41 (step S1502: No). . When the electric accessory opening / closing process is thus completed, FIG.
After returning to the electric accessory control process 2 (step S1490), the process further returns to the main loop process of FIG. In the main loop process, since the electric accessory control process is repeatedly executed, the electric accessory control process of FIG. 32 is executed again, and further, the electric accessory opening / closing process of FIG. 34 is executed (FIG. 32: step S1490). In the electric accessory control process (see FIG. 34), if the countdown timer is not “0”, the process returns to the main loop process again (step S1).
502: No), the return to the main loop process and the execution of the electric accessory opening / closing process are repeated until the countdown timer reaches “0”. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the electric accessory 41 open until the opening time set in the countdown timer elapses.

If the opening time elapses while the return to the main loop process and the execution of the electric accessory opening / closing process are repeated, “Yes” is determined in step S1502, and step S150 is performed.
4 shifts to “Electrical character article closing process”. In this process, the electric accessory 4 is transmitted by transmitting a control signal to the electric accessory driving unit 42 (see FIG. 7) connected to the main control device 100.
1 is driven to bring the electric accessory 41 into a closed state. Next, the time during which the electric accessory 41 is kept closed is set in the countdown timer. In this embodiment, the countdown timer is set to “0.5.
Seconds "(FIG. 34: step S1506). By setting the closing time to a short time in this way, in the high support mode in which the electric accessory 41 is opened multiple times,
Even if the electric accessory 41 is closed, the next opening is performed immediately in a short time.
The electric accessory 41 can be quickly returned to a state where it is easy to enter the ball.

When the electric accessory 41 is switched from the open state to the closed state, since the opening of the electric accessory 41 is completed once, the value of the remaining open counter is counted down (step S1508). Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining open counter is “0” (step S1510). If the remaining open counter is “0” (step S1510: Yes), the electric accessory 41 is set for the set number of times.
Is released, the in-support flag is reset to end the support mode (step S1512). If the remaining open counter is not “0”, the opening operation for the set number of times has not been completed yet, and thus the electric accessory opening / closing process is terminated without resetting the supporting flag (step S1510: No). .

On the other hand, when the electric accessory is not being opened (step S1500: No), the electric accessory 41
Is closed, this time, the process of opening the electric accessory 41 is performed. First, it is determined whether or not the countdown timer is “0” (step S1514). When the electric accessory 41 is in the closed state, as described above, the countdown timer is set with a time (closed time) for maintaining the electric accessory 41 in the closed state (see step S1506). Therefore, when the countdown timer is not “0”, the closing time has not yet elapsed, so
The electric accessory opening / closing process is terminated without opening 1 (step S1514: No).

As described above, when the electric accessory opening / closing process ends and the process returns to the electric accessory control process (see FIG. 32), the process returns to the main loop process (see FIG. 13), and then the electric accessory control again. The process is executed (FIG. 13: Step S1010), and the electric accessory opening / closing process is called (FIG. 32: Step S1490). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the process returns to the main loop process until the countdown timer reaches “0” (step S1514: No).
Thus, the return to the main loop process and the execution of the electric accessory opening / closing process are repeated until the countdown timer reaches “0”, thereby closing the electric accessory 41 until the closing time set in the countdown timer elapses. Can be kept in a state.

If the countdown timer reaches “0” after the closing time has elapsed (step S1514:
Yes), “Electrical character opening process” in step S1516 is executed in order to open the electric character 41. In this process, a control signal is transmitted to the electric accessory driving unit 42 to thereby make the electric accessory 41
Is driven to open the electric accessory 41. After the electric accessory 41 is thus opened, processing for setting the countdown timer for the time (open time) for maintaining the electric accessory 41 in the open state is performed.

Here, in the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described processing for setting the symbol variation time (see FIG. 33), it is determined whether or not the mode is the high support mode (step S1518). If not, the process is branched. By doing so, it is possible to provide a difference in the opening time of the electric accessory 41 between the high support mode and the low support mode. Whether or not the mode is the high support mode can be determined by referring to the high support mode flag. When the mode is not the high support mode (step S1518: No), the countdown timer is set to “
0.2 second "is set (step S1524). On the other hand, in the case of the high support mode (step S1518: Yes), it is further determined whether or not it is in the open / close mode (step S1520).
) When in the open / close mode (step S1520: Yes), the countdown timer is set to “0.2 seconds” as in the low support mode (step S1524).

As described above, when the electric accessory 41 is opened during the open / close mode of the large entrance 60, in addition to the ball that is caused by entering the large entrance 60, the second operation port 25b is entered. However, if the opening time in the open / close mode is set to be short as described above, the ball that is caused by the ball entering the second operating port 25b is removed. Can be suppressed. Also, during the opening / closing mode of the big entrance 60, if the opening time is set short regardless of whether or not it is in the high support mode, depending on whether or not it was in the high support mode when shifting to the jackpot gaming state,
There will be no great difference in the number of balls resulting from entering the second working port 25b. As a result, it is possible to suppress the total number of winning balls that are paid out during the open / close mode of the large entrance 60, and to suppress variations in the number of balls that are played for each jackpot game.

In this embodiment, in the low support mode (step S1518: No)
The open time set in the countdown timer is the same in the open / close mode (step S1520: Yes), but different open times may be set.
In this way, the electric accessory 41 is activated during the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 and in the low support mode.
Since the opening time of the second operation port 25b is different, the frequency of entering the second operation port 25b and the ratio of the frequency of entering the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b are different between the open / close mode and the low support mode. It becomes possible to make it. On the other hand, if the opening time is the same as in the present embodiment, the processing can be made common between the low support mode and the open / close mode, so the program can be kept simple and the ROM 110 can be maintained. It is possible to save the capacity of the program area 111 and to reduce the processing load of the MPU 102 that executes the program.

If it is in the high support mode and not in the open / close mode (step S1518: Ye)
s and step S1520: No), the countdown timer is set to "1.6 seconds" (
Step S1522). In this way, in the high support mode, by setting a longer opening time than in the low support mode, the electric accessory 41 is in the open state for a longer time in the high support mode than in the low support mode. As a result, it is possible to accelerate the entrance into the second working port 25b than in the low support mode.

In this embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the high support mode is in effect (step S1518).
Then, although it is determined whether or not it is in the open / close mode (step S1520), the determination may be performed in the reverse order. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the switch is in the open / close mode. When the switch is in the open / close mode, the opening time for the low support mode is set. . If the mode is the high support mode, the opening time is set for the high support mode, and if the mode is not the high support mode, the opening time for the low support mode is set. In this way, it is not necessary to determine whether or not it is in high support mode during the open / close mode.
It is possible to reduce the processing load on the MPU 102 in the open / close mode. Conversely, if the high support mode is determined first, it is not necessary to determine whether the switch is in the open / close mode when it is not in the high support mode (in the low support mode). It is possible to reduce the processing load on the MPU 102 in a state other than the support mode.

When the opening time of the electric accessory 41 is set in the countdown timer (step S1524 or step S1522), the electric accessory opening / closing process in FIG. 34 is terminated and the electric accessory control process in FIG. After that, the process returns to the main loop process of FIG. 13 (see step S1010 of FIG. 13). By repeatedly executing such an electric accessory control process in the main loop process, the electric accessory 41 is opened and closed, and as a result, a high support mode and a low support mode are realized.

As described above, in the main loop process of FIG. 13, the external output process (step S1
000) to the electric accessory control process (step S1010), a predetermined cycle (4
msec). Here, the numerical values of various counters referred to in each process described above are updated by “timer interrupt process” that generates an interrupt at a predetermined time period with respect to the main loop process. In this way, it is possible to update the counter value as needed while executing each process of the main loop process. Hereinafter, such timer interrupt processing will be described. The remaining time processing of the main loop processing (step S101
4) will be described in detail later.

D-2. Timer interrupt processing:
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing. Such processing is
This process is executed by the MPU 102 in response to an interrupt that occurs during the execution of the main loop process described above. In the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, such an interrupt is generated at a cycle of 2 msec by using the timer interrupt function of the MPU 102. Therefore, such timer interrupt processing is also repeatedly executed at a cycle of 2 msec. . Note that the period of occurrence of the interrupt is not limited to 2 msec, but may be any period, but is preferably shorter than the period of the main loop process. In this way, the timer interrupt process is executed at least once between the execution of each process in the main loop process and the next execution. It is possible to reliably update the value of the counter between the time when the reference is made and the time when the next reference is made.

Further, since the timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined time period, the elapsed time can be measured by counting the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed. For example, when the number of execution times of timer interrupt processing reaches 2 times (2 msec × 2
), It is possible to detect the elapse of the main loop processing repetition time (4 msec) (see step S1012 in FIG. 13). This is preferable because it is not necessary to separately provide a timer for detecting the elapsed time. In the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the number of timers provided in the main control device 100 can be suppressed and the device configuration can be kept simple by detecting the repetition time of the main loop processing by a method that takes time.

In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 35, first, “1” is added to the value of the random number initial value counter 141b to update the value of the random number initial value counter 141b (step S1600). As described above, the random number initial value counter 141b is a counter that designates an initial value for starting the count-up of the jackpot random number counter 141a (see FIG. 9). By updating the value of the random number initial value counter 141b, when the value of the big hit random number counter 141a is cycled and the count up is restarted, the count up can be restarted from an initial value different from the previous value. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is repeated at a constant cycle. Here, as described above, the random number initial value counter 141b is also updated in the main loop process (see FIG. 9). However, as described later, the main loop process sets the random number initial value counter 141b when the process is repeated. It is not always updated every time. Therefore, if the value of the random number initial value counter is also updated in the timer interrupt processing, the value of the random number initial value counter 141b can be reliably updated. As a result, the value winning the lottery lottery is aimed at. Operating port 2 at the timing when the numerical value is repeated
It is possible to more surely avoid an illegal act such as entering a game ball into 5.

When the numerical value of the random number initial value counter is updated (FIG. 35: Step S1600), the values of other counters in the counter area 141 (see FIG. 8) are updated (FIG. 35: Step S1602). That is, “1” is added (incremented) to each value of the jackpot random number counter 141a, the jackpot type counter 141c, the variation type counter 141d, the reach random number counter 141e, and the electric accessory release counter 141f. As described above, since each of these counters constitutes a loop counter, by updating the counter value by timer interrupt processing, these counters repeatedly change a value within a predetermined range while successively changing the value. It becomes possible to point.

As described above, in this embodiment, the counter area 141 is provided with a buffer corresponding to each counter, and the value of each counter can be stored in the corresponding buffer (
(See FIG. 8). Therefore, the updated value may be stored in each buffer when each counter is updated. At this time, depending on the timing at which the timer interrupt processing is started, the buffer may be referred to from the processing in the main loop processing. In such a case, only the counter value is updated and the main interrupt processing is started. After the reference from the processing in the loop processing is completed, the counter value is copied to the buffer. In this way, it is possible to reliably avoid the possibility that the value of the buffer is updated while the processing in the main loop processing is referring to the buffer. Also,
Since the counter value can be updated even while the buffer is being referenced, the counter value can be reliably updated regardless of the timing at which the main loop process is called. In this way, it is possible to avoid the possibility of receiving fraud such as manipulating the counter value to generate a jackpot by hindering the updating of the counter value. After updating the value of each counter and the value of the buffer corresponding to the counter in this way, next, “actuating entrance entering processing” in which the entrance into the operating entrance is detected and various processes are performed on the entrance (FIG. 35: step S1604). ).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the flow of the working port entrance processing. As shown in the drawing, in the operation port entry processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is an entry in the first operation port 25a (step S1620). That is, the timer interrupt process is a process that is repeatedly executed, but there is a predetermined time interval between the execution of the timer interrupt process and the next execution. Therefore, if there is a ball in the first operating port 25a during this period, a predetermined process is performed on the ball. Whether or not a ball has entered the first operating port 25a can be determined by reading the detection state of the sensor 25as provided in the first operating port 25a. When there is a ball entering the first working port 25a (step S1620: Yes), first, the first working port 25a is set to pay out the winning ball for the ball entering the first working port 25a. The number of winning balls is written in the RAM 140 (step S1622). In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls of the first working port 25a is set to “3” and is stored in advance in the ROM 110.
What is necessary is just to write in AM140. The number of prize balls written in the RAM 140 is transmitted to the payout control device 410 by the external output process (FIG. 13: step S1000) of the main loop process. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 13.

After the number of winning balls is written in the RAM, a signal is output to the external output terminal 910 in order to notify an external device such as a hall computer that a ball has entered the first operating port 25a (step S1624). Such a signal can be output in various modes. For example, it is only necessary to output a pulse to a terminal for transmitting that the ball has entered the first working port 25a. In this way, the hall computer connected to the external output terminal 910 detects the pulse,
It is possible to easily detect a ball entering the first working port 25a. Since the timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a short time period, the first operation port 25 can be obtained in an external device such as a hall computer by performing the process of outputting a signal in the timer interrupt process.
It is possible to grasp the ball entering a in almost real time. When a signal is output to the external output terminal 910, “information acquisition processing” (FIG. 36: step S1626) is then executed.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a flow of information acquisition processing. This process is a process of acquiring information from each counter when the ball enters the operation port 25 and updating the number of suspensions of the operation port 25. Here, the information acquisition process is executed not only for the entry into the first operation port 25a as described later but also for the entry into the second operation port 25b (step S1634 in FIG. 36). See). Therefore, in the information acquisition process, first, it is determined whether or not the operation port to be processed is the first operation port 25a (step S1650 in FIG. 37). The working port to be processed is the first
If it is the operation port 25a (step S1650: Yes), then, the first operation port 25a.
It is determined whether or not the number of holds has reached the upper limit (step S1652). As described above, since the number of holdings of the first working port 25a is stored in the holding number storage area 142a of the first working port holding storage area (see FIG. 12), the holding stored in the holding number storage area 142a. What is necessary is just to determine whether the number has reached the upper limit (four in this embodiment).

If the number of holds has reached the upper limit (step S1652 of FIG. 37: Yes), the number of holds has reached the upper limit, so the information acquisition process is terminated without holding the current entry.
On the other hand, when the number of holdings has not reached the upper limit (step S1652: No), a process of holding the current entry is subsequently performed. First, “1” is added to the number of reservations of the first working port stored in the number-of-holds storage area 142a in response to the increase in the number of reservations of the first working port 25a (step S1654). Further, since the total number of reservations increases due to the increase in the number of reservations in the first working port, “1” is added to the value of the total reservation number storage area 142i (step S1656).

Next, a process of storing each value of the holding acquisition counter group in the first working port holding storage area is performed (step S1658). That is, as described above, the first working port reserved storage area is provided with four storage areas from the first area to the fourth area, and each area is a jackpot that can store the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a. A random number storage area 142b, a jackpot type storage area 142c that can store the value of the jackpot type counter 141c, and a reach random number storage area 142d that can store the value of the reach random number counter 141e are provided (FIG. 1).
2). Accordingly, in response to the game ball entering the first working port 25a, the values of these counters (holding acquisition counter group) are acquired and stored in the storage areas of the first working port holding storage area. To do. If the storage area of the storage area from the first area to the fourth area is determined according to the ordering of the storage areas described above (the order of the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area). Good. In other words, if there is no hold, it may be stored in the first area, and if there is a hold and some of the storage areas are used, they are stored in the next storage area in this order. For example, if there is one hold and the first area is used, it may be stored in the next second area, or if there are two holds and the second area is also used. May be stored in the next third area. It can be determined by referring to the value of the reserved number storage area 142a which storage area is used (that is, the reserved number).

In this way, if the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is acquired in response to the ball entering the first operating port 25a, the acquired value is compared with the jackpot lottery table (FIG. 16).
In step S1072 of the variable display start process), a jackpot lottery based on the timing at which the game ball enters the first operation port 25a can be executed. Similarly, by acquiring the value of the type counter 141c triggered by entering the first operating port 25a, it is possible to determine the jackpot type based on the timing of entering the first operating port 25a. (See step S1078 in FIG. 16). In addition, by acquiring the value of the reach random number counter triggered by entering the first working port 25a, it is possible to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a reach effect based on the timing of entering the first operating port 25a. It becomes possible. When the value of each counter is stored in the first working port storage area as described above (FIG. 37: step S1658), FIG.
The information acquisition process of FIG. 36 is terminated and the process returns to the operation port entrance process of FIG. 36 (step S16 of FIG. 36).
26).

In the operation port entry processing, if the above-described processes for the first operation port 25a are executed, this time,
Processing for the second working port 25b is performed. First, it is determined whether or not there is a ball in the second working port (step S1628). Whether or not there is a ball in the second operating port 25b is determined by whether the second operating port 25
It can be determined by reading the detection state of the sensor 25bs provided in b. If there is no entry, the operation entrance entry process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interruption process (step S162).
8: No). On the other hand, if there is a ball entering the second working port 25b, the number of winning balls of the second working port 25b is written in the RAM in the same manner as the processing for the first working port 25a described above (step S1630).
). In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls in the second working port 25b is set to “4” which is larger than the number of prize balls in the first working port 25a and is stored in the ROM 110 in advance. The number of winning balls is read and written in the RAM 140. The number of prize balls written in the RAM 140 is the first mentioned above.
Similar to the number of winning balls of the operation opening 25a, the external output processing of the main loop processing (FIG. 13: Step S
1000), the predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 13.

After the number of winning balls is written in the RAM 140, a signal is output to the external output terminal 910 in order to notify an external device such as a hall computer that a ball has entered the second operating port 25b (FIG. 36: Step S1632). The output of the signal is the first operating port 2 described above.
Similar to the signal for notifying the entry to 5a, it can be transmitted using various methods.
After outputting a signal to the external output terminal, next, as in the case of the first operating port 25a described above,
An information acquisition process (see FIG. 37) is executed.

When the information acquisition process is executed, it is determined to be “No” in step S1650, and each process (steps S1660 to S166) for updating the holding number of the second working port 25b is determined.
6) is executed. First, it is determined whether or not the number of reserves in the second working port 25b has reached the upper limit (step S1660). Since the number of holdings of the second working port 25b is stored in the holding number storage area 142e of the second working port holding storage area, if this value reaches the upper limit value, no further holding is performed, so information is acquired. The process is terminated and the operation port entrance process is resumed (step S1).
660: Yes).

On the other hand, if the number of reserves in the second operating port 25b has not reached the upper limit, the first operating port 2 described above.
Similarly to the case of 5a, “1” is added to the holding number of the second working port 25b (“1” is added to the value of the holding number storage area 142e of the second working port holding storage area) (step S166).
2) “1” is added to the total number of holds (“1” is added to the value of the total number of holds storage area 142i) (
Step S1664). Further, a process of storing each value of the counter group in the second working port storage area is performed (step S1666). The process of storing each value of the counter group in the second working port holding storage area may be performed in the same manner as in the case of the first working port 25a described above (step S1658). As described above, the second working port 25b is similar to the first working port 25a in the second working port 2b.
By acquiring the value of each counter triggered by entering the ball 5b, based on the timing of entering the second operating port 25b, a lottery lottery, determining the jackpot type, whether or not there is a reach effect It becomes possible to decide. When the information acquisition process for the entrance of the second operating port is completed as described above, the process returns to the operation entrance entrance process of FIG. 36 (step S1634).
Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process of FIG. 35 (see step S1604 of FIG. 35).

36, the detection state of the sensor provided in the first working port 25a or the second working port 25b is read out when the ball enters the first working port 25a or the second working port 25b. However, when the detection state of such a sensor is read, the detection state is reset. For example, when a sensor of a type that latches an electric signal at a predetermined voltage level when a ball enters the first operating port 25a or the second operating port 25b is used, the latch is released after the detection state is read out. In this way, it is possible to reliably detect the incoming ball after reading. In addition, if the detection state is reset immediately after reading out, even if it takes time to execute the processing for entering the operation port due to processing for a plurality of operation ports, it is possible to enter the operation port. This is preferable because there is no risk of losing detection of the sphere.

In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 35, the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 2 are as described above.
After performing the process for entering the ball 5b (the operation port entering process in step S1604), subsequently, a “through operation port entering process” for performing various processes for entering the through operation port 24 is executed ( Step S1606).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the flow of the through operation entrance ball entering process. Such a process is a process of updating the holding number of the through operation port 24 or acquiring the value of the counter when triggered by entering the through operation port 24. When the process is started, first, it is determined whether or not there is a ball in the through operation port 24 (step S1680). Whether or not there is a ball entering the through operating port 24 is obtained by acquiring the detection state of a sensor (sensor 24s) provided in the through operating port 24 in the same manner as the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b described above. Judgment is possible. Through operating port 2
If there is no entry to No. 4, the through operation entrance entry process may be terminated as it is (step S1680: No).

On the other hand, when there is a ball entering the through operation port 24 (step S1680: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the number of holdings of the through operation port 24 has reached the upper limit value (step S1).
682). In the ball and ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of holds of the through operation port 24 is stored in the electrically-powered object holding area 144 of the RAM 140, and an upper limit value (four in this embodiment) is referred to this number of holds. To determine whether or not If the number of holdings of the through operation port 24 has reached the upper limit value, it is determined that the holding is not stored any more, and the through operation port entrance processing is terminated as it is (step S1682: Yes).

On the other hand, when the holding number of the through operation port 24 has not reached the upper limit value (step S168).
2: No), “1” is added to the number of holdings of the through operation port 24 in response to the ball entering the through operation port 24 (step S1684). Although the detailed description is omitted, the number of reserves of the through operation port 24 is reflected on the lighting state of the display lamp 82 by the main controller 100, so that the number of reservations of the through operation port 24 can be displayed by the display lamp 82. It becomes possible. Next, the value of the electric accessory release counter 141f is stored in the electric accessory holding area 144 (step S1686). Although the detailed description of the electric-powered item holding area 144 is omitted, the electric-purposed item holding area 144 is also provided with the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the holding number, similarly to the holding storage area 142. The electric accessory release counter 14 is stored in the storage area.
By storing the value of 1f, it is possible to store the hold up to the upper limit value of the hold number. As described above, by acquiring the value of the electric-powered object opening counter 141f in the electric-powered object holding area 144 in response to the entry of the through operation port 24, the above-described electric-powered object opening control process (
In FIG. 32), it is possible to perform a lottery (support lottery) triggered by the entry of the through operation port 24. When each of the above processes is performed, the through operation hole entrance process of FIG. 38 is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process of FIG.

In the bullet ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the prize ball is not paid out for the entry into the through operation port 24. However, unlike this, the prize is awarded for the entry into the through operation port 24. It is good also as what pays out a ball. In this case, following the process for determining whether or not to enter the through operation port 24 (see step S1680 in FIG. 38), the number of prize balls in the through operation port 24 is stored in the RAM 140.
The process of writing in The number of prize balls for the through operation port 24 may be stored in advance in the ROM 110, read out and written into the RAM 140. The number of prize balls written in the RAM 140 is the same as in the case of the prize balls in the operating port 25 described above, in the external output process (
Since it can be transmitted to the payout control device 410 in step S1000) in FIG. 13, it is possible to pay out the game balls for the number of prize balls set in the through operation port 24 to the upper plate 13.

The process of writing the number of prize balls of the through operation port 24 in the RAM 140 can be executed in the process related to the through operation port 24 in the main loop process (the electric accessory control process in step S1010). If the timer interrupt process is executed as described above, the interrupt process is executed in preference to the main loop process. It is possible to pay out with certainty.

As described above, in the timer interruption process, the values of the counters such as the jackpot random number counter 141a and the random number initial value counter 141b are updated, and the first operation port 25a, the second operation port 25b, and the through operation port 24 are updated. The value of each counter is stored in the holding storage area 142 and the electric-powered item holding area 144 with the entry of the ball. By doing so, in the above-described main loop process, it is possible to advance the game while performing a lottery or the like triggered by entering the operation port 25 or the through operation port 24.

Further, as described above, in the bullet ball game machine 10, the progress of such a game is controlled by the main control device 10.
While controlling at 0, by transmitting various commands from the main control device 100 to the sub-control device 200 (see step S1000 in FIG. 13), the sub-control device 200 is operated to produce the effect display device 30 and various Various effects using lamps can be executed. As a result, it is possible to execute various effects according to the progress of the game and to further enhance the interest of the game.

Here, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball is received into the operation port 25, and a value is acquired from each counter (holding acquisition counter group) and stored in the holding storage area 142. Therefore, if the information (holding counter information) in the holding storage area 142 is stored in a command and transmitted to the sub-control device 200, the sub-control device 200 determines an effect mode based on the holding counter information. Is possible. For example, since the counter information at the time of holding includes the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a, referring to this value, the main controller 1
It is possible to grasp the success / failure determination result of the jackpot lottery before the symbol variation display is started at 00. For this reason, for example, when displaying the image indicating the hold on the effect display device 30, by displaying an image different from the image indicating the normal hold, the player is notified that the hold corresponds to the jackpot. It is possible to execute such an effect. Alternatively, since the value of the jackpot type counter 141c is included in the on-hold counter information, it is possible to grasp the jackpot type before starting the variable display of symbols. For this reason, it is also possible to notify the player of the jackpot type by setting the image indicating the hold displayed on the effect display device 30 to an image corresponding to the jackpot type. If you use the counter information on hold,
It is possible to produce an effect (holding display effect) using such a hold display, and as a result, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Of course, not only such a hold display effect, but using the counter information at the time of holding, it is possible to grasp the result of the jackpot lottery and the type of jackpot before the variable display of the symbol is started, so the result of the jackpot lottery and the type of jackpot It is possible to execute various effects by determining the presence / absence of effect execution and the effect mode based on the effect. For example, if a specific effect image is displayed on the condition that there is a hold corresponding to the jackpot, the player who has seen the effect image greatly increases the expectation for the jackpot, and thus attracts the player strongly to the game. Is possible. In addition, since such an effect can be performed before the display of the variation of the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is started, for example, the timing earlier than the timing when the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is performed (for example, corresponding to the jackpot) A series of performances that last from the time when the change display of the hold that entered before the hold is started) to the time of occurrence of the jackpot, or the content of the stage changes gradually as the hold corresponding to the jackpot approaches It is also possible to execute a production that goes on. By doing so, the player gradually increases the sense of expectation for the jackpot as the performance progresses, so that the player can be more strongly attracted to the game.

However, as described above, if the pending counter information is transmitted to the sub control device 200 as it is, the data amount of the command increases or the command data amount increases. There is a tendency for the types to increase. For this reason,
Processing for determining whether or not to produce an effect using the counter information at the time of holding and determining the effect mode are performed in the main control device 100, and the processing result is stored in a command and transmitted to the sub-control device 200. Is desirable. However, when such processing becomes complicated, the main control device 10
There is a risk that the processing load of 0 increases and the game control processing is hindered. Therefore, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the processing related to such effects is executed as follows using the remaining time processing of the main loop processing, so that these processing can be executed by the main control device 100. However, it is possible to avoid the possibility of hindering the game control.

D-3. Remaining time processing:
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the remaining time processing flow of this embodiment. Such processing is performed in the main loop processing such as symbol game processing (step S1000 in FIG. 13).
This process is executed using a time (residual time) until a predetermined repetition time (4 msec) elapses after performing Step S1010) (see Step S1014 in FIG. 13).

As shown in FIG. 39, in the remaining time processing, first, the random number initial value counter 141b
The value of the random number initial value counter 141b is updated by adding “1” to the value of (Step S170).
0). Similarly, “1” is added to the value of the fluctuation type counter 141d to change the fluctuation type counter 14d.
The value of 1d is updated (step S1702). Thus, by updating the random number initial value counter 141b and the variation type counter 141d using the remaining time processing, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the values of these counters have a time period. That is, MPU10
When the counter value is updated by 2, the MPU 102 operates based on a pulse signal (so-called base clock) having a fixed period as an operation reference, and therefore the timing for updating the counter value tends to have periodicity. . In particular, when the process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle as in the main loop process of the present embodiment, when the counter value is updated in such a process, the counter value is updated until the next update. Since the time interval is constant, the counter update interval is constant, and as a result, the time interval from when the counter points to a certain value to the same value also becomes constant. As described above, if the value of the counter has such periodicity, there is a risk that the player may receive an illegal act such as causing a game ball to enter the operation port 25 aiming at the timing of winning the big hit lottery.

In this regard, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the remaining time processing is repeatedly executed using the remaining time in which each processing (step S1000 to step S1010 in FIG. 13) in the main loop processing is executed. The possibility that the counter has periodicity can be avoided. That is, in each process in the main loop process, the process is performed according to the entry into the through operation port 24 and the operation port 25, or the process is branched according to the game state. The processing content to be executed changes accordingly. Therefore, the time required for these processes is not constant and varies depending on the game situation. In addition, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop process and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 35) is executed, the main loop is continued until the timer interrupt process is completed. Although the execution of the process is waited for, the process for the timer interrupt process is also performed according to the ball entering the through operation port 24 and the operation port 25. Change accordingly,
As a result, the waiting time for main loop processing changes. For these reasons, the time required to execute a series of main loop processing (steps S1000 to S1010 in FIG. 13) varies depending on the game situation. As a result, the remaining time also depends on the game situation. Will change.

Then, as described above, in the main loop process of the present embodiment, the remaining time process is repeatedly executed until the remaining time runs out (see step S1012 and step S1014), so the number of times the remaining time process is repeatedly executed is It will change according to the situation. As a result, the number of times the values of the random number initial value counter 141b and the variation type counter 141d are updated (that is, the value added to the counter value) changes substantially randomly. As a result, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the values of the random number initial value counter 141b and the variation type counter 141d have periodicity. As a result, the game ball is placed in the operation port 25 with the aim of winning the big hit lottery. It is possible to avoid a situation in which an illegal act such as entering a ball is received.

In the remaining time processing of FIG. 39, after updating the value of the random number initial value counter 141b and the value of the variation type counter 141d (step S1700, step S1702), the sub-control device indicates that a game ball has entered the operation port 25. “Operation entrance ball command” to notify 200
Is determined in the command buffer 145 (step S1704). Since the operation port entry command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 200 of entering the operation port 25, if there is an entry into the operation port 25, the operation port entry command may be set. The presence or absence of a ball entering the operating port 25 can be determined by various methods. For example, when the entrance into the operation port 25 is detected in the operation port entrance processing (see FIG. 36) in the timer interruption process (after step S1620: Yes or after step S1628: Yes in FIG. 36). It is good also as what detects the entrance into an operation port by setting a flag and referring to this flag.
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the number of holds in the hold storage area 142 is increased by comparing the state of the hold storage area 142 when the remaining time processing was executed last time and the state of the hold storage area 142 this time. By doing this, it may be determined whether or not there is a ball entering the working port. If there is an incoming ball, it is determined that an operating port incoming command is to be set (step S1704 in FIG. 39: Yes), and then the “operating port incoming command setting process” in step S1706 is executed. On the other hand, working port 2
If there is no entry to 5, there is no need to set an operation entrance entry command, so the remaining time process is terminated and the process returns to the main loop process (step S 1704: No).

40 and 41 are flowcharts showing the flow of the operation entrance ball command setting process. This process is a process of setting an operation port entry command in the command buffer 145 in response to a ball entering the operation port 25. The sub-control device 200 can detect that a ball has entered the operation port 25 by receiving this operation port entry command, and various processes such as changing the number of suspensions displayed on the effect display device 30. Can be executed. In addition, if various information related to entering the operating port 25 (such as a result of a big lottery when triggered by entering the operating port 25) is included in the operating port entering command, the sub-control device 200 Then, it becomes possible to determine the production mode based on various types of information related to the entry. In addition, since the command for entering the operation port is transmitted at the time of entering the operation port, the sub-control device 200 displays various kinds of information related to the entry before the symbol change display corresponding to the entry is performed. It is possible to reflect this information in the production content. In the operation port entry command setting process of the present embodiment, an operation port entry command including various kinds of information related to entering the operation port 25 is set.

First, since the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with two operation ports, the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b, an operation port entry command is transmitted to the sub-control device 200. In this case, information specifying which of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b has entered the ball is transmitted to the sub-control device 200 via the operating port entering command. It is desirable. Therefore, in the operation port entry command setting process, it is determined whether or not the operation port having entered the ball is the first operation port 25a (step S1720), and the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25 are determined.
The process is branched depending on which of the operating holes b is entered.

It can be determined by various methods whether the first operation port 25a or the second operation port 25b has entered the ball. For example, when a ball entering the first working port 25a is detected in the above-described working port ball entry processing (see FIG. 36) (Step S1620: Yes), or when a ball entering the second working port 25b is detected. A flag is set in (Step S1628: Yes), and it is only necessary to detect which operation port has been entered by referring to this flag. Alternatively, as described above, the state of the holding storage area 142 when the remaining time processing was executed last time is compared with the state of the holding storage area 142 of this time, and the operating port in which the number of holdings increases is specified. By doing so, it may be determined which of the operation ports has entered the ball. If it is the second operation port 25b that has entered the ball (step S1720: No), this is an operation port entry command that transmits to the sub-control device 200 that the ball has entered the second operation port 25b. The “second operation port entering command” is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1732).

On the other hand, in the case of entering the first operation port 25a (step S1720: Yes), not only the fact that there was an entry to the first operation port but also various information related to the entry. Also, the following processes are executed so as to be transmitted to the sub-control device 200. First, in order to refer to the value (counter information at the time of holding) acquired from each counter at the time of entering the ball, a storage area in which the counter information at the time of holding is stored is specified (FIG. 40: step S1722). That is, the first
First working port storage area for storing information when entering the working port 25a (see FIG. 12)
Since four storage areas from the first area to the fourth area are provided, it is specified in which storage area the pending counter information that is the target of command setting is stored. Here, it is the latest entry that is the target of the entry entry command, and as described above, the counter value is stored in order from the first area. Therefore, if the number of holds is grasped by referring to the number-of-holds storage area 142a, it is possible to specify the storage area in which the counter information at the time of holding corresponding to the latest entry is stored. For example, if the number of holds is 3, the on-hold counter information is stored in the three storage areas of the first area, the second area, and the third area. It can be determined that the counter information is stored in the third area, which is the last storage area, in the order in which the on-hold counter information is stored.

When the storage area corresponding to the entry is specified in this way (step S1722), the value of the big hit random number counter 141a stored in the big hit random number storage area 142b of the specified storage area is acquired (step S1724). If the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is acquired in this way, it is possible to acquire the determination result of the jackpot lottery by referring to the jackpot lottery table. However, in this embodiment, instead of referring to the jackpot lottery table, a “holding type table” described below is referred to. In this way, as will be described next, it is possible to acquire not only the success determination result of the jackpot lottery, but also the hold type determined for each value of the jackpot random number counter 141a.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a hold type table. As shown in the figure, in the hold type table, a hold type is associated with each value of the jackpot random number counter 141a. Here, the correspondence between each value of the jackpot random number counter 141a and the jackpot type corresponds to the aforementioned jackpot lottery table (see FIG. 10). That is, FIG.
In the jackpot lottery table for the non-probable change state shown in FIG. 2, lottery values (values of the jackpot random number counter) “7” and “307” are associated with jackpots, but these “7” and “307” The jackpot lottery table for probability variation state shown in FIG. 10B is also associated with the jackpot (see the numbers enclosed by broken lines in FIG. 10). Corresponding to this, in the hold type table of FIG. 42, the values “7” and “
307 ”corresponds to the jackpot in both the non-probability change state and the probability change state,
It is classified as “Common winning hold”.

In addition, in the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state, although it is associated with the jackpot,
A value that is not associated with a jackpot in the jackpot lottery table for the non-probable variation state corresponds to a jackpot only in the case of a certain variation state. For this reason, these values are "probability limited winning hold"
It is classified into. The other values that do not correspond to the jackpot in the jackpot lottery table are classified as “normal hold”.

In step S1726 of FIG. 40, by referring to such a hold type table,
The hold type corresponding to the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter is specified. As will be described in detail later, by acquiring such a hold type, it is possible to execute a hold display effect that enhances the fun of the game using the hold display displayed on the effect display device 30. The specified hold type may be stored in the general-purpose area 146 of the RAM 140. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp the hold type in each subsequent process.

When the hold type is specified (step S1726), in order to specify the jackpot type corresponding to the hold, the value of the jackpot type storage area 142c of the storage area is acquired (step S1728) and the acquired value is corresponded. The jackpot type is specified with reference to the sorting table of FIG. 11 (step S1730). When the hold type and the jackpot type are specified in this way, subsequently, each process of FIG. 41 is executed in which an operation entrance ball command to be transmitted to the sub-control device 200 is determined based on the hold type and the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 41, first, it is determined whether or not the hold type is normal hold (step S1750). In the case of the normal suspension (step S1750: Yes), the command buffer 145 sends a “first operation port entry command D” for transmitting the fact of the normal suspension to the sub-control device 200.
(Step S1764). In the sub-control device 200, by receiving the first operation port entry command D, the fact that there has been an entry to the first operation port 25a and the value of the big hit random number counter 141a acquired at the time of the entry is a big hit. It becomes possible to grasp that it does not fall under.

If the hold type is not normal hold (step S1750: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot type corresponds to a 2R jackpot (an implicit probability variable 2R jackpot or an explicit probability variable 2R jackpot) (step S1752). In the case of 2R jackpot (step S1752:
Yes) As in the case of the normal suspension, the first operation port entry command D is sent to the command buffer 14
5 is stored. That is, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, 2R jackpots and 15R jackpots can be generated, but the 2R jackpot has a property that the number of rounds is small and the opening time of the large entrance 60 is short. For this reason, in the case of winning the 2R jackpot and the case of winning the 15R jackpot, there is a tendency that the player's feeling of uplifting is greater when the 15R jackpot is won. In view of these points, in this embodiment, in the case of 15R jackpot, the sub-control device 200 normally responds to the occurrence of the hold corresponding to the 15R jackpot by transmitting a command different from the case of the normal hold. On the other hand, for the case of 2R jackpot, by sending the same command as the normal hold,
It is possible to perform the same effects as normal hold.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the case of 2R jackpot, the first same as the normal hold
The operation port entry command (first operation port entry command D) is transmitted to the sub-control device 200. However, even in the case of 2R big hit, the first operation port entry command different from the normal suspension is transmitted. It is good. In this way, since it is possible to grasp that the hold corresponding to the 2R jackpot has occurred in the sub-control device 200, it is possible to execute an effect different from the normal hold in response to the occurrence of the 2R jackpot hold. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if the same command is transmitted as described above, the number of types of commands can be suppressed, so the storage area of the ROM for storing the commands can be saved or the commands can be received. Thus, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sub-control device 200 that determines the type of command.

If it is not 2R jackpot (if 15R jackpot, step S1752: No),
Next, it is determined whether or not the normal 15R big hit (step S1754). In the case of a normal 15R big hit (step S1754: Yes), the “first operation port entry command C” is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1762). By receiving the “first operation port entry command C”, the sub-control device 200 recognizes that there has been an entry to the first operation port 25a, and the jackpot random number acquired when the entry is made It is possible to grasp that the value of the counter 141a corresponds to the jackpot and that the jackpot type is normally 15R jackpot.

Usually, when 15R jackpot is not reached (when probability variation 15R jackpot is reached, step S1754: N
o) Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hold type is a probability variation limited winning hold (step S1756).
If the hold type is probability variation limited winning suspension (step S1756: Yes), “first operation entrance ball command B” is set (step S1760), and if it is not probability variation limited winning suspension (in the case of common winning suspension, step S1756: No), the “first operation port entry command A” is set (step S1758). By doing so, the sub-control device 200 receives the “first operation port entry command A” or the “first operation port entry command B”, so that the jackpot random number counter acquired upon entry is received. It becomes possible to grasp that the value of 141a corresponds to the jackpot and that the type of jackpot is a probability variation 15R jackpot. In addition, "first
In the case of receiving the “operation opening ball command A”, the holding type is the common winning hold,
When the “operation opening ball command B” is received, it is possible to grasp that the hold type is the probability variation limited win hold. As described above, when various actuation port entry commands are set according to the hold type and the jackpot type, the entry operation command setting process of FIG. 40 and FIG. 41 is ended.

The operation port entry command stored in the command buffer 145 is sent to the sub-control device 200 when the remaining time ends and the process returns to the external output process of the main loop process (see step S1000 in FIG. 13). Is sent. As a result, immediately after the ball enters the operation port 25, it is possible to transmit the operation port input command to the sub-control device 200.

FIG. 43 is an explanatory view exemplifying the data structure of the above-mentioned various operation entrance ball commands.
As shown in the drawing, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation port entry command is composed of two bytes, an upper byte and a lower byte. Of these, the upper 4 bits of the upper byte are
It corresponds to each command type such as change start command, shift notification command, opening start command, etc., and since all the commands shown in the figure are operation entrance ball commands, all have the same value “1000”. Is set. On the other hand, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are set according to whether the working port that has entered the ball is the first working port 25a or the second working port 25b. In the operation port entry command corresponding to the ball (first operation port entry command A to first operation port entry command D), it is set to “1000”, and in the second operation port entry command, “1100 "Is set. Therefore, in the sub-control device 200, the command type is identified by referring to the upper byte of the command, and any of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b is specified. It is possible to specify whether the command is an operation entrance ball command resulting from entering the operation aperture.

In addition, there are four types of commands from the first operation port input command A to the first operation port input command D in the operation port input command related to the input to the first operation port. It is possible to identify which command is a command by referring to the lower byte. In other words, different data for each command is set in the lower byte of the command for entering the first operation port. For this reason, the sub-control device 200 can identify which command is one of the four types of commands by referring to the lower byte of the received operation entrance ball command. As described above, since the command to be transmitted is determined based on the hold type and the jackpot type, the sub-control device 200 identifies the command in this way, thereby grasping the hold type and the jackpot type, as well as the hold type and the jackpot type. An effect mode can be determined based on the type.

Note that such an operation port entry command is stored in the ROM 110 in advance, and the ROM 11
It may be read from 0 and stored in the command buffer 145, or M
The PU 102 may manipulate each bit of the 2-byte data to create a command, and store the created command in the command buffer 145.

As described above, in the working port entrance processing of the present embodiment, based on the value of each counter (holding counter information) acquired when the game ball enters the working port 25, the holding type and jackpot The type is specified, and the operation entrance ball command to be transmitted to the sub-control device 200 is determined based on the specified hold type and jackpot type. For this reason, in the sub-control device 200, it is possible to specify the hold type and the jackpot type based on the received operation opening ball command, and as a result, determine the effect mode based on the hold type and the jackpot type. Is possible.

As described above, if the main control device 100 determines the holding-entry ball entering command by specifying the holding type and the jackpot type based on the on-hold counter information, the sub-control device 200 determines the jackpot type and the holding based on the command. Since the type can be specified, the sub-control device 2
There is no need to send the on-hold counter information to 00. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the sub control device 20 can grasp the hold type and the jackpot type while the sub control device 200 can grasp the hold type and the jackpot type.
It is possible to avoid a situation in which the data size of the command transmitted to 0 increases.

Further, the counter 1 is added to the command transmitted from the main control device 100 to the sub control device 200.
When the value 41a (holding counter information) is stored, there is a possibility that the value of the counter 141a may be obtained by illegally reading a signal between the main control device 100 and the sub control device 200. In such a case, there is a possibility that a lottery value corresponding to the jackpot will be estimated based on the value of the random number counter 141a, or the entrance timing for winning the jackpot may be estimated. In this respect, if the hold type or jackpot type is transmitted to the sub-control device 200 using the operation entrance ball command in this way, even if the signal is illegally read, the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a itself is read. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which damage is caused by such fraud.

In addition, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the setting process of the operation entrance ball command is executed in the remaining time process (see step S1706 in FIG. 39). In this way, processing related to the progress of the game is executed in the main loop processing, and if the operation entrance ball command is set in the remaining time after executing each processing, the operation entrance ball command is set. Even if the processing becomes complicated, it is possible to create an operation entrance ball command without hindering each processing in the main loop processing. For example, in the above-described working port entry command setting process (see FIG. 40) of the present embodiment, which holding type corresponds to which holding type the value of the jackpot random number counter acquired at the time of entering the working port. Although it is specified by referring to the table, in order to specify the hold type, the value of the jackpot random number counter acquired at the time of entering the ball is checked against each of a plurality of numerical values associated with the hold type table. There is a need to. Explaining with an example, in the example of the hold type table shown in FIG.
It is necessary to collate the value of the jackpot random number counter acquired at the time of entry with each numerical value associated with each of the numerical values associated with (“7” “307”) and each numerical value associated with “probability limited limited hold”. is there. Since a plurality of numerical values must be collated in this way, the processing for specifying the hold type tends to increase the processing time.

Of course, if the numerical value associated with the hold type table is determined according to a simple rule, it is possible to simplify such collation processing. For example, if a numerical value from “0” to “20” is associated with the probability variation limited winning suspension, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter acquired at the time of entering the ball is “20 or less”. It is possible to determine whether or not the probability variation limited hold is satisfied. However, since the hold type table corresponds to the jackpot lottery table as described above, if the hold type table is to be simplified in this way, the jackpot lottery table must be simplified. In such a case, since the lottery value corresponding to the jackpot follows a simple rule, this time, it becomes easy to be damaged by fraud. For these reasons, it is actually difficult to set the numerical value associated with the hold type table (the numerical value associated with the hold type corresponding to the jackpot) according to a simple rule. The verification process to be performed takes time.

In this regard, in this embodiment, even if it takes time to specify the hold type, since this process is performed in the remaining time, it is possible to avoid the possibility of hindering each process in the main loop process. . Of course, it is possible to avoid the possibility of causing trouble not only for each process in the main loop process but also for each process in the timer interrupt process executed by interrupting the main loop process, and each process executed in the timer interrupt process. Can be properly implemented. For example, in the timer interrupt process, the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is updated (FIG. 3).
5 in step S1602), the timer interrupt processing repetition cycle (in this embodiment, 2).
msec) is delayed, the probability that the jackpot random number counter 141a points to each value is
It will not be the same between each value. For example, the jackpot random number counter 141a is “0”.
When the timer interrupt processing repetition cycle is delayed in the state of indicating “0”, the time indicating “0” is longer than the time indicating other numerical values. It will be higher than the probability of pointing to a numerical value. When the operation port incoming ball command setting process is executed in the timer interrupt process, if the operation port incoming ball command setting process takes time, there is a possibility that such inconvenience may occur due to that.

In this regard, if the processing for entering the entrance ball command is performed for the remaining time, even if the entrance ball command setting process takes time, the processing time for the timer interrupt processing is prolonged and the timer interrupt processing is performed in a predetermined manner. There is no risk of being unable to execute in a time cycle. Therefore, the counter update process (step S1602 in FIG. 35) executed in the timer interrupt process,
It is possible to reliably execute the process (refer to Step S1604 and Step S1606) for detecting a ball entering the operation port 25 or the through operation port 24 and appropriately advance the game. The timer interrupt process can be executed by interrupting the command setting process even when the command setting process is being executed (the MPU 102 interrupts the command setting process and executes the timer interrupt process). Even if it takes a long time, timer interrupt processing can be reliably executed.

In addition, since the timer interrupt process can be executed reliably, the hold counter information is reliably acquired by the timer interrupt process when executing the operation entrance ball command setting process. Based on the information, it is possible to reliably set the operation entrance ball command. For the above reasons, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the data amount of the command to be transmitted to the sub-control device 200 is increased while appropriately performing various effects based on the hold type and the jackpot type. It is possible to avoid such a situation, and in addition, it is possible to appropriately control the game while avoiding the possibility of trouble in the control of the game.

Note that, as described above, various commands such as the operation hole entry command stored in the command buffer 145 of the main control device 100 are external output processing of the main loop processing (FIG. 13).
In step S1000), the sub-control device 200 receives the information, and the sub-control device 200 can execute various processes related to the production.

Here, since the sub-control device 200 can grasp the hold type and the jackpot type by receiving the operation entrance ball command, it is possible to determine the production contents according to the hold type and the jackpot type. . Of course, the sub-control device 200 can grasp the jackpot type and the hold type by the “variation start command”, but as described above, the variation start command is transmitted when the symbol variation display is started. On the other hand, the operation port entry command is transmitted immediately after entering the operation port 25. For this reason, even if the variable display of the symbol for the incoming ball is not immediately started (when it is held), it is possible to grasp the hold type and the jackpot type with the sub 200, and therefore the variable display starts. It is possible to reflect the jackpot type or the hold type in the effect that is executed prior to the timing of the event (the effect that is executed during the hold). In the following, as an example of reflecting the jackpot type and the hold type in the contents of the processing executed by the sub control device 200 in response to the command transmitted from the main control device 100 and the effect executed during such hold, The “hold display effect” will be described.

E. Control contents of sub-control unit:
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the flow of command response processing executed by the sub control device 200. Such a process is a process executed by the MPU mounted on the sub-control device 200. The MPU of the sub-control device 200 performs such a process at a predetermined time period (for example, 2 msec).
The commands sent from the main control device 100 are processed one after another by repeatedly executing them at intervals. In addition, commands sent from the main control device 100 are stored in a command buffer provided in the sub-control device 200. In the command handling process, commands are taken out from the command buffer one by one, Execute the process corresponding to the command. Note that if there is no command to be processed in the command buffer, such as when a command has not yet been sent from the main control device 100 or when all the sent commands have been processed, the process starts executing. Exit immediately after.

From the main control device 100, there are various types of commands such as a change start command for notifying that the change display of symbols has been started on the segment type display device 70 and an opening start command for notifying that the opening time has started. Will be sent. Therefore, in the command handling process, the type of the command extracted from the command buffer is specified, and the process corresponding to the type of command is performed.

First, it is determined whether or not the command to be processed is an operation entrance ball command (FIG. 44: step S2000). As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, the command has a 2-byte data structure, and the command type is stored in the 2-byte data.
Therefore, by analyzing such data, it is possible to determine whether or not the command is an operation entrance ball command. For example, in the operation entrance ball command illustrated in FIG. 43, the command type is stored in the upper byte of the two bytes constituting the command as described above, and the upper 4 bits “1000” of the upper byte are set. Indicates that the command is a ball entry command. Therefore, by analyzing the upper 4 bits of the upper byte of the command, it is possible to determine whether or not it is an operation entrance ball command. If the command is an operation entrance ball command (step S2000: Yes), in response to this, the “operation entrance entrance command response process” in step S2012 is executed.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the flow of the processing for entering the operation port command. In such processing, first, it is determined whether or not the operation port entry command to be processed is the second operation port entry command (step S2030). As illustrated in FIG. 43, since the operation entrance ball command has different data (bit string) set for each command, it is determined whether or not it is the second entry operation ball command by examining the command data. Is possible.

When the command to be processed is the second operation port entry command (step S2030:
Yes), the numerical value of the second working port holding number counter provided in the sub-control device 200 is counted up (step S2048). Although detailed explanation is omitted, the ball game machine 1 of this embodiment
In 0, the sub-control device 200 includes a holding number counter (a first working port holding number counter, a second working port holding number counter) that counts the number of holdings for each of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b. By using these counters, it is possible for the sub-control device 200 to grasp the number of suspensions of each operation port. When an operation entrance ball command is received, it means that the number of holdings has increased, so these counters are counted up. As will be described later, these counters are counted down when the main controller 100 completes the hold and sends a hold shift notification command. The sub-control device 200 can reflect the number of reservations at each operation port in the display content of the effect display device 30 based on the values of the first operation port reservation number counter and the second operation port reservation number counter.

When the second working port hold counter is counted up (FIG. 45: Step S2048),
Next, in order to display a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 30 with an increase in the hold of the second operation port, a “second operation port hold increase command” is transmitted to the display control device 300 (step S2050). ). In the display control device 300, the second operation port hold display area on the effect display device 30 by receiving the second operation port hold increase command (see FIG. 6A).
Update the display status of. That is, in response to the increase in the number of holdings of the second working port 25b, the same number of design symbols as the number of holdings after the increase is transferred from the first area b1 to the fourth area b4 of the second working port holding display area. Display in order from the first area (displayed with left justification). By doing this,
It is possible to display the number of reservations of the second working port using the effect display device 30.

On the other hand, when the operation port entry command is not the second operation port entry command (step S2030: No in FIG. 45), the command is the operation port entry command for entering the first operation port. The value of the one-operation-port hold number counter is counted up (step S2032). Next, it is determined whether or not the operation port entry command is “first operation port entry command A” (step S2).
034). If it is the first operation port entry command A (step S2034: Yes), in response to this, the “hold increase command A” is transmitted to the display control device 300 (step S203).
6). When receiving the hold increase command A, the display control device 300 displays the same number of design symbols as the number of hold of the first operation port in the first operation port hold display area (see FIG. 6) of the effect display device 30. At this time, in this embodiment, a hold display effect is displayed for displaying different design symbols for each type of the hold increase command. The hold display effect will be described in detail later.

If the processing target entry command is not the first entry command A (step S2034: No in FIG. 45), it is subsequently determined whether or not the “first entry command B”. (
In step S2038), if it is not the first operation port entry command B, it is subsequently determined whether or not it is “first operation port entry command C” (step S2042). And if it is the 1st operation mouth entrance command B, "hold increase command B" will be transmitted corresponding to this (step S2040), and if it is the 1st operation entrance entrance command C, In response to this,
The “hold increase command C” is transmitted to the display control device 300 (step S2044). When the operation port entry command to be processed is not any of the first operation port entry command A to the first operation port entry command C, it is “first operation entrance command D”. In response to
The “hold increase command D” is transmitted to the display control device 300. The hold display effect performed by the display control apparatus 300 in response to the hold increase command B or the hold increase command D will be described in detail later. As described above, when the pending increase command corresponding to each operation entrance command is transmitted to the display control device 300, the operation entrance command response processing in FIG. 45 is terminated, and the command response processing in FIG. Return (step S2012 in FIG. 44)
See).

In the command corresponding process of FIG. 44, when the command to be processed is not an operation entrance ball command (step S2000: No), it is determined whether or not the command to be processed is a “pending shift notification command”. (Step S2002). Whether or not the command is a hold shift notification command can be determined by analyzing the command to be processed, as in the case of the operation opening ball command described above. If the command to be processed is a hold shift notification command (step S2002: Yes), the “hold shift notification command handling process” in step S2010 is executed.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the flow of the pending shift notification command response process. As described above, since the hold shift notification command is a command transmitted when the hold is digested, in this process, a hold number counter (first operation port hold) that receives the hold shift notification command and grasps the hold number is received. The number counter and the second working port hold number counter) may be counted down. First, the working ports where the suspension is digested are the first working port 25 a and the second working port 2.
5b is determined (step S2070). As described above, since the hold shift notification command includes information specifying the operation port where the hold is consumed, the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b are analyzed by analyzing the hold shift notification command. It is possible to determine which of the operating port holds is digested.

When the target of the digestion is the second working port 25b (step S2070: Yes),
Since the holding of the second working port 25b is digested, the value of the second working port holding number counter is counted down (step S2076). Next, in order to update the hold display displayed on the effect display device 30, a “second operation port hold number decrease command” is transmitted to the display control device 300.
When receiving such a command, the display control device 300 erases one design symbol for hold display displayed in the second operation port hold display area (see FIG. 6) of the effect display device 30 from the right. As a result, the decrease in the number of holds is reflected in the second operation port hold display area of the effect display device 30.
It becomes possible to display the same number of design symbols as the number of the second working ports 25b after the reservation digestion.

On the other hand, when the subject of the pending digestion is the first working port 25a (step S2070 in FIG. 46:
No) Since the holding of the first working port 25a is digested, the value of the first working port holding number counter is counted down (step S2072). Next, as in the case of the second operation port 25b described above, a command for updating the hold display of the effect display device 30 (first operation port hold number decrease command) is transmitted to the display control device 300 (step S2074). . In response to such a command, the display control device 300 erases one of the design symbols for holding display displayed in the first working port holding display area from the right, thereby reducing the holding of the first working port 25a first. It is reflected in the working port hold display area. Thereby, it is possible to display the same number of design symbols as the number of reservations of the first working port 25a after the digestion in the first working port holding display area. With the above processing, when the decrease in the number of holdings is reflected in the display of the holding number counter (the first operating port holding number counter and the second operating port holding number counter) of the sub-control device 200 and the holding display area of the effect display device 30. Then, the pending shift notification command handling process is terminated and the process returns to the command handling process of FIG. 44 (see step S2010 of FIG. 44).

In the command corresponding process of FIG. 44, the command to be processed is not an operation entrance ball command (
If it is not a hold shift notification command (step S2000: No) (step S20)
02: No), and then, it is determined whether or not the command is related to the special advantageous state (“special advantageous state start command” or “special advantageous state end command”) (step S2004).
). If the command is related to the special advantageous state (step S2004: Yes), processing corresponding to these commands is performed (step S2008).

First, in the case of the “special advantageous state start command”, the sub controller 200 recognizes that the special advantageous state has been started in the main controller 100, in the RAM of the sub controller 200. Set the flag. Further, in order to notify the display control device 300 that the special advantageous state has started, a “special advantageous state start command” is transmitted to the display control device 300. When notifying the display control device 300, the main control device 1
The special advantageous state start command received from 00 may be extracted from the command buffer and transmitted to the display control device 300 as it is. In this way, it is not necessary to previously store the command to be transmitted to the display control device 300 in the sub control device 200, so that the storage capacity of the ROM of the sub control device 200 can be saved. Of course, a command different from the command received from the main control device 100 may be transmitted. When receiving such a command, the display control device 300 sets a “special advantageous state flag” for storing the special advantageous state. In the display control device 300 of the present embodiment, the hold display symbol to be displayed in the hold display area of the effect display device 30 is determined according to the state of the special advantageous state flag. This point will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, in the case of the “special advantageous state end command”, in order for the sub control device 200 to recognize that the special advantageous state has ended in the main control device 100, the sub control device 2.
The special advantageous state flag set in the RAM of 00 is reset. Further, as in the case of the special advantageous state start command described above, a “special advantageous state end command” is transmitted to the display control device 300 so that the display control device 300 can grasp that the special advantageous state has ended. . At this time, similarly to the above-described special advantageous state start command, the command received from the main control device 100 may be transmitted to the display control device 300 as it is. Of course, a command different from the command received from the main control device 100 may be stored in advance and the command may be transmitted. When receiving such a command, the display control device 300 resets the “special advantageous state flag” described above.

If the command to be processed is not a command related to the special advantageous state (step S
2004: No), the command to be processed is “variation start command”, “variation end command”, and the like. For these commands, see “General Command Handling Process” (
This is dealt with in step S2006).

47 and 48 are flowcharts showing the flow of general command handling processing.
In such processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command to be processed is a “variation start command” (
Step S2090). In the case of a change start command (step S2090: Yes),
Since the variable display of the symbol is started in the segment type display device 70, processing for determining the content of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 30 is performed in accordance with the variable display of the symbol. Such processing can be performed by referring to the effect content table storing the effect content.

Here, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the symbol variation display is “indefinite probability variation 2R jackpot” or “special loss” (step S20).
92), the content table to be referred to is switched between “non-explicitly probable 2R jackpot” or “special loss” and other cases. The determination of whether or not the implicit probability change 2R is a big hit or special loss can be performed by analyzing a “game result command” (see step S1088 in FIG. 17) sent together with the change start command. That is, as described above, the game result command includes information on the result of the jackpot lottery and the type of jackpot. By analyzing this game result command, it is determined whether or not it is an unspecified probability 2R jackpot or special loss. Can be determined.

In the case of the unspecified probability 2R jackpot or special loss, the content of the effect is determined with reference to the common effect content table (step S2094). In the common effect content table, since a plurality of effect contents with different time required for effect are stored, based on the variable display time of the pattern of the segment type display device 70, it is actually executed from the plurality of effect contents. Determine the contents of the performance to be performed. Since the change start command includes information related to the change display time of the symbols of the segment type display device 70, it is possible to grasp the change display time by analyzing the change start command.

In the common effect content table, the display mode of the effect symbols displayed on the effect display device 30, the lighting state of various lamps provided in the bullet ball game machine 10, the content of the sound output from the speaker 14, etc. are set. It is possible to keep. In addition, it is possible to set in detail the manner in which the effect symbol is displayed. For example, the variable display time for variably displaying the effect symbol of the effect display device 30, the presence / absence of the reach effect described above, and the reach effect can be set. In the case of execution, it is possible to set the timing for starting the reach display (the time from the start of the symbol variation display to the start of the reach display). Furthermore, the line L of the effect display device 30 at the time of reach display.
1 to L5 (see FIG. 6) which line is used for reach display, the type of character design 32 used for reach display, and the combination of the character design 32 when the variable display is stopped and stopped Etc. can also be set. Step S2092 of FIG.
Then, by referring to the common effect content table, effect contents such as various lamp lighting modes and effect symbol patterns displayed on the effect display device 30 are determined.

Here, in the present embodiment, the same effect content table (common effect content table) is referred to in the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot and in the case of special loss. By doing so, in the bullet ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lighting state of various lamps, the display content of the effect display device 30, and the like are the same in the case of the unspecified probability 2R jackpot and in the case of special loss. So
It becomes difficult for the player to discriminate the uncertain probability variation 2R jackpot and the special loss from the lighting states of various lamps and the display contents of the effect display device 30. This makes it possible for players to have the expectation that a probabilistic condition may have occurred,
As a result, the player can be attracted by the game.

On the other hand, if it is neither an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot or a special loss (step S2
092: No), the content of the effect is determined with reference to the normal effect content table. In the same manner as the above-described common effect content table, this normal effect content table is also a variety of contents related to effect modes such as the effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 30, the effect symbol variation display time, and the lighting status of various lamps. Can be set in advance. In step S2096, based on the fluctuation display time obtained by analyzing the fluctuation start command (symbol fluctuation display time on the segment type display device 70), the contents of the effect to be executed are determined from these effects.

The effect content determined in step S2094 or step S2096 is the sub-control device 2.
The effect content area provided on the 00 RAM is set. The sub-control device 200 can execute the effect of the determined effect content by controlling the operation of various lamps and the speaker 14 while referring to the effect content area. In addition, the sub control device 200 stores the effect content related to the effect display device 30 in the “display content command” and transmits it to the display control device 300. In the display control device 300, by displaying various images on the effect display device 30 according to the display content command, it is possible to display the effect image on the effect display device 30 along the determined effect content.

In general command handling processing, if the command to be processed is not a change start command (
Next, it is determined whether or not the command to be processed is an “opening start command” (step S2098). If it is an opening start command (step S2098: Yes), the opening time is started in the main control device 100, so that the effect content to be executed during the opening time is determined, and the determined effect content is sub-control device. The effect content area is set to 200 (step S2100).
Further, the contents of the effect performed by the effect display device 30 are stored in the effect content command, and the display control device 3.
Send to 00. As a result, it is possible to execute effects using the various lamps, the speaker 14, and the effect display device 30 with the start of the opening time.

If the command to be processed is not an opening start command (step S2098)
: No) Next, it is determined whether or not it is an “ending start command” (step S21
02). In the case of an ending start command (step S2102: Yes), in response to the start of the ending time, the content of the effect to be executed at the ending time is determined and set in the effect content area (step S2104). In addition, the production contents related to the production display device 30 are stored in the production content command and transmitted to the display control device 300. As a result, various effects can be performed in accordance with the start of the ending time.

If the command to be processed is not an ending command (step S2012:
No) Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it is a “large entrance opening command” (FIG. 48: step S21).
20). In the case of the large entrance opening command (step S2120: Yes), the large entrance 6
In response to the opening of 0, the content of the effect performed when the large entrance 60 is opened is set in the effect content area (step S2124). If the command to be processed is not a large entrance opening command (step S2120: No), it is determined whether or not it is a “large entrance closing command” (step S2126). If it is a mouth closing command, the content of the exercise to be performed when the large entrance 60 is closed is set in the effect content area (step S2128). Thereby, according to the opening / closing operation | movement of the large entrance 60, it becomes possible to perform the effect for an open state, and the effect for a closed state. As for the effect at the time of opening the big entrance and the effect at the time of closing the big entrance, the content of the effect related to the effect display device 30 is stored in the effect content command and the display control device 300 as in the case of the ending effect described above. It is possible to execute an effect using the effect display device 30 by transmitting to.

In addition, when the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is in the low frequency entrance mode, the time for the large entrance 60 to be in the open state is short. It may be determined whether the frequency entry mode, and the effect is executed only in the high frequency entry mode. The open / closed mode of the large entrance 60 is selected from the high frequency entrance mode and the low frequency entrance mode when the large entrance opening command or the large entrance closing command is set. By storing the information to be stored in the command, the sub-control device 200 can determine.

If the command being processed is not a large entrance opening command or a large entrance closing command (
Step S2120: No, Step S2126: No) This time, it is determined whether or not it is a “variation end command” (step S2130). In the case of a change end command (step S
2130: Yes), in response to the end of the symbol variation display time, the effect display device 30
A “variable display stop command” is transmitted to the display control device 300 in order to stop (determine display) the effect image that has been variably displayed in FIG. In response to this, the display control apparatus 300
The variation display of the effect display device 30 is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the command to be processed is not a change end command (No in step S2130), since it is other various effect commands, effect setting processing is performed corresponding to each command. Although detailed description is omitted, various effects can be executed using the speaker 14, various lamps, and the effect display device 30 by transmitting such various commands from the main control device 100 to the sub-control device 200 in a timely manner.

As described above, in the command response processing (FIGS. 47 and 48) performed by the sub control device 200, various commands transmitted from the main control device 100 are received and processing corresponding to the type of command is performed. Thus, various effects are executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the main control device 100. At this time, it is also possible to execute various effects using the effect display device 30 by transmitting various commands to the display control device 300. Also,
As described above, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold control type and the jackpot type can be grasped by the sub-control device 200 based on the operation entrance signal, so that one of the effects using the effect display device 30 can be obtained. As a mode, a “hold display effect” for changing the image displayed in the hold display area (first operation port hold display area and second operation port hold display area) of the effect display device 30 according to the hold type or the jackpot type. It is also possible to execute. Hereinafter, the hold display effect performed by the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

F. Hold display effect:
49 and 50 are explanatory views illustrating the contents of the hold display effect of this embodiment. FIG.
9 (a) illustrates a state in which design symbols having a shell as a motif are displayed in three areas from the first area a1 to the third area a3 of the first working port hold display area. As described above, the first operation port hold display area corresponds to the number of reservations of the first operation port 25a, and the number of design symbols (hold display symbols) in the first operation port hold number display area is the first operation port. By making it correspond to the number of holdings of 25a, it is possible to display the number of holdings of the first working port 25a.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (a), three design symbols are displayed in the first working port holding display area in response to the number of holdings of the first working port 25a being “3”. ing. Similarly for the second working port hold display area, the number of design symbols displayed in the second working port hold display area can be made to correspond to the number of hold of the second working port 25b, as shown in FIG. 49 (a). In the example
Two design symbols are displayed in the second working port holding display area in correspondence with the number of holdings of the second working port 25b being “2”. As described above, when the display control device 300 receives the hold number increase command, the display control apparatus 300 adds one design symbol to the hold display area of the operation port where the hold is increased, and on the other hand, the hold number decrease command (first When the operating port hold number decrease command or the second operation port hold number decrease command) is received, the design symbol is set to 1 from the corresponding hold display area.
Erase one. By doing so, it is possible to quickly reflect the change in the number of reservations at each operating port in the display content of the effect display device 30.

In this embodiment, the design symbol displayed in the hold display area is called a hold display symbol. Such a hold display symbol may be stored in advance in the ROM of the display control device 300 and read out from the ROM and displayed when displayed on the effect display device 30.

Here, in the hold display effect of the present embodiment, the hold display symbol to be displayed in the first operation port hold display area is determined based on the type of the operation port entering command received by the sub control device 200. First, when the sub-control device 200 receives the “first operation port entry command A”, as illustrated in FIG. Hold display design (
The hold display symbol A) is displayed. As described above, when the sub control device 200 receives the first operation entrance command A, the “hold increase command A” is transmitted to the display control device 300 (see step S2036 in FIG. 45). The display control apparatus 300 may display the hold display symbol A when the hold increase command A is received.

When the hold increase command A is received, the hold display symbol A may not be displayed at all times, but the hold display symbol A may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
In the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned “special advantageous state flag” is set, that is, in the case of a special advantageous state (a state in which the probability change state and the high support mode are in progress), such a hold display symbol A is displayed. In other cases, a description will be given assuming that a normal hold display design (in the example of FIG. 49, a design design with a shell as a motif) is displayed.

As described above, the first operation entrance ball command A is transmitted when the holding type is “common winning hold” (see step S1758 of FIG. 41). In this way, when the holding type is common winning hold, the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a acquired at the time of entering the operation port is either the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state or the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability variation state. Is also a jackpot (see FIG. 10 and FIG. 42). For this reason, if the hold corresponding to the hold display symbol A is digested and the jackpot lottery is performed, the jackpot will be won regardless of whether the gaming state is a probability change state or a non-probability change state.

Therefore, by displaying the hold display symbol A, the player recognizes that when the hold on the hold display symbol A is digested, a big hit will occur in both the non-probability change state and the probability change state. It becomes possible to make it. As a result, the player can play the game while recognizing the result generated when the hold is digested, and by changing the aim of the game ball to be fired according to the recognized result, It is also possible to change. This makes it possible to provide the player with a new way of enjoying playing a game while considering how to proceed with the game according to the displayed on-hold display symbol.

For example, when the hold display symbol A is displayed, the player wins the jackpot in both the probability change state and the non-probability change state, so the player does not have to digest the hold during the probability change state. It may be considered that it is sufficient to digest the suspension after ending the process and becoming indeterminate. In such a case, a game ball may be launched aiming at entering the second working port 25b so as not to digest such holding. As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold of the second operation port 25b is digested in preference to the hold of the first operation port 25a.
If a game ball is inserted into the second operation port 25b and the number of reservations of the second operation port 25b is ensured, it is possible to avoid digestion of the hold on the hold display symbol A.

On the other hand, the player may want to win the jackpot as soon as possible. For example, if you have a limited time to play a game, such as when the game hall is close, or if you have another job after the game, you should finish the jackpot game within the limited time. There is a tendency to want to secure a ball. In such a case, the second operation port 25b is put on hold by removing the aim from the second operation port 25b so that the launched game ball does not enter the second operation port 25b or by stopping the launch of the game ball. By eliminating, it is possible to digest the hold on the hold display symbol A. In this way, the player can change the way the game proceeds based on his / her own judgment, so that the game can be further enjoyed.

In addition, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of jackpot related to the hold display symbol A is a probability change jackpot (probability change 15R jackpot) (see step S1754 and step S1758 of FIG. 41), and hold Since the display symbol A is displayed in the case of the probability variation state (in the case of a special advantageous state), the second operation port 25 is displayed by displaying the hold display symbol A.
It is possible to guide the player to a game mode in which a game is played aiming at entering into b. That is, the player can recognize that if a big hit is generated after the hold on the hold display symbol A is digested, the probability change state occurs after the big win. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs due to the ball entering the second operating port 25b, there is a case where a non-probable change state occurs after the big hit (normally 1
If you win a jackpot type that does not result in a promising state such as 5R jackpot). Generally, in the probability variation state, it is easier to win a jackpot than in the non-probability variation state, so the player tends to play a game while hoping that the probability variation state will continue. In particular, as in this embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by jackpot game in the probability variation state is almost equal to the number of prize balls that can be obtained by jackpot game in the non-probability state (significantly reduced). If there is no such), this tendency is stronger. Therefore, if you leave the hold on the display display symbol A until you win the jackpot and the gaming state becomes an uncertain change state, you will digest the hold when it becomes an uncertain change state. Thus, it is possible to return the gaming state to the probable state again. For this reason, when the on-hold display symbol A is displayed, the player tends to play a game aiming at entering the second operation port 25b. By displaying the hold display symbol A in this way, it is possible to guide the player to a game mode aiming at the second operation port 25b.

Note that the hold display symbol A may be displayed not in the probability variation state but in the non-probability variation state, and in this way, the game mode is changed to avoid entering the second operating port 25b. It is possible to guide the person. That is, the player can recognize that it is possible to shift from the non-probability change state to the probability change state by digesting the hold related to the hold display symbol A. As described above, since the player has a tendency to desire to advance the game in the probability changing state, in such a case, the second operation port 25 tries to shift to the probability changing state by digesting the holding on the holding display symbol A.
There is a tendency to launch a game ball in a state where the aim is removed from b, or to stop the launch of the game ball. This makes it possible to guide the player to a game mode that avoids entering the second operating port 25b.

FIG. 49 (c) shows a holding display symbol (holding display symbol B) in which the character “probability” is added in a circle.
) Is displayed. In the hold display effect of the present embodiment, the sub control device 2
When 00 receives the “first operation entrance ball command B”, such a hold display symbol B is displayed. As described above, when the sub-control device 200 receives the first operation port entry command B, the sub-control device 200 transmits a “hold increase command B” to the display control device 300 (see step S2038 in FIG. 45). In the control device 300, when the hold increase command B is received, the hold display symbol B may be displayed. In the present embodiment, the hold display symbol B is displayed only in the special advantageous state (probability change state and the state in the high support mode) as in the case of the hold display symbol A described above, and in other cases Shall display a normal hold display symbol.

As described above, the first operation port entry command B is a case where the hold type of the hold generated by entering the operation port is “probability limited limited hold” (see step S1760 in FIG. 41). In the case of the probability variation limited winning suspension, the jackpot random number counter 141a acquired at the time of entering the operation port
This value corresponds to the jackpot only in the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state. Therefore, when the hold corresponding to the hold display symbol B is digested and the jackpot lottery is performed, the jackpot is won only when the gaming state is in the probable change state, and the jackpot is not won in the case of the non-probability change state. It will be.

By displaying such a hold display symbol B, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of thinking about how to proceed with the game or selecting how to proceed with the game according to the displayed hold display symbol. That is, if the player thinks that the hold applied to the hold display symbol B will be won in the probable state only when the hold on the hold display symbol B is won in the probable state, the second operation port In order to prevent the on-hold digestion of the first operating port 25a from being performed only after the on-hold digestion of the 25b, a game ball is fired with the aim removed from the second operating port 25b, or the game ball Can be stopped. By displaying the hold display symbol B in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting how to advance the game according to the hold display symbol.

In the present embodiment, since the hold display symbol B is not displayed in the non-probable change state,
It is also possible to avoid the possibility that the player loses interest in the game due to the hold display symbol B. In other words, when such a hold display symbol B is displayed in the non-probability change state, the player thinks that the player could win a big hit, but could not win because the game state is in the non-probability change state. It may happen that you wake up with the impression that you have lost. In this regard, if the on-hold display symbol B is not displayed in the uncertain change state, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the player has such dissatisfaction.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold on the hold display symbol B corresponds to the probability variation jackpot (probability variation 15R jackpot) (step S1754, step S1756, step S in FIG. 41).
1760). From this, by displaying the hold display symbol B, the second working port 2
It is possible to strongly guide the player in the way of proceeding the game to avoid entering 5b. That is to say, the hold on the hold display symbol B not only wins the jackpot only in the case of the probability change state, but the gaming state is surely changed to the probability change state after winning the jackpot. In general, the player tends to want to proceed with the game in a probable state, and therefore has a tendency to strongly desire to quickly digest such holding. For this reason, since the tendency to play a game while avoiding entering the second operating port 25b is further strengthened, it is possible to strongly induce the player to a game mode that avoids entering the second operating port 25b.

In addition, since we want to quickly digest the hold on the hold display symbol B in this way,
It is possible to improve the interest of the effect performed when the hold of the second working port 25b is digested. In other words, when the hold of the second operating port 25b is digested and the jackpot is won, depending on the type of the jackpot that has been won, there may be a transition to a non-probable change state (usually a jackpot without a probability change state such as 15R jackpot) in the case of). Therefore, the player can use the second working port 2
When the hold of 5b is digested and the change display of the symbol is started on the effect display device 30, the effect display device 30 is watched while hoping that no jackpot will be generated. This makes it possible to attract the player more strongly to the game.

In addition, when the suspension of the second operating port 25b is digested and the effect display device 30 displays the variation of the effect symbol, the probability that the big hit will not occur is higher than the probability that the big win will occur. Therefore, in the state in which the hold display symbol B is displayed, the effect display device 30 produces a result (disappearance) that is desirable for the player more frequently than a result that is undesirable for the player (bonus).
Can be displayed. In general, in an effect that is normally performed using the effect display device 30, the frequency with which a desired result (image corresponding to a jackpot) is displayed is low, and the frequency with which an undesirable result (image corresponding to a loss) is displayed. Although it is high, a desired result can be displayed on the effect display device 30 at a frequency opposite to the normal frequency. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of the player more than the normal effect performed using the effect display device 30, and to greatly increase the interest of the player than the normal effect.

In addition, when the hold display symbol B is displayed, it is sufficient that the image corresponding to the detachment is displayed only a limited number of times until the hold is consumed, so that the effect of the effect by the effect display device 30 is further increased. It is possible to improve. In other words, the player can watch the display content of the effect display device 30 in a state where the player knows how many times the symbol is to be displayed before the hold on the hold display symbol B is consumed. . In such a case, every time an image corresponding to a deviation is displayed, the remaining number of times is counted down and the expectation that the target hold can be digested gradually will be gradually increased, and the target hold can be managed somehow. In addition, the display device 30 is watched while hoping that the image corresponding to the detachment should be continued several times. For this reason, the player's consciousness can be strongly attracted to the effect display device 30, and great joy can be given to the player when the intended hold is reached. This makes it possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the sub-control device 200 receives the “first operation port entry command C”, as shown in FIG. A hold display symbol (hold display symbol C) is displayed. As described above, when the sub-control device 200 receives the first operation port entry command C, the “hold increase command C” is transmitted to the display control device 300 (step S2044 in FIG. 45 is executed). When the display control apparatus 300 receives the hold increase command C, the display control apparatus 300 may display the hold display symbol C. In this example,
Similar to the above-described hold display symbol A and hold display symbol B, the hold display symbol C is displayed only in the special advantageous state (the state in which the probability change state is in the high support mode), and in other cases, the normal hold A display design shall be displayed.

Even when the hold display symbol C is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while considering how to proceed with the game, like the hold display symbol A and the hold display symbol B described above. In other words, the hold for the hold display symbol C usually corresponds to the jackpot type 15R jackpot (see step S1754 and step S1762 in FIG. 41). However, after the big hit game, it will shift from the probabilistic state to the non-probable state. Therefore, when a player who has visually recognized the hold display symbol C wants to continue the probability change state, in order to avoid the hold on the hold display symbol C being consumed,
What is necessary is just to make a game ball enter into the 2nd operation port 25b, and to increase the holding | maintenance number of the 2nd operation port 25b.
On the other hand, if you want to win the jackpot because you do not mind the probability change state, you can launch a game ball with the aim off the second operating port 25b, or launch a game ball. What is necessary is just to digest the holding | maintenance concerning the hold display symbol C by stopping. Thus, even when the hold display symbol C is displayed, the player can play a game while considering how to proceed with the game according to the hold display symbol, and as a result, the game can be further enjoyed. .

Further, in the hold display effect of the present embodiment, the hold display symbol C is displayed in the probability variation state, so that the hold display symbol C is displayed in the same manner as the hold display symbol A and the hold display symbol B described above. Thus, it is possible to guide the player to a specific game mode. That is, when the hold on the hold display symbol C is digested, the gaming state that has been in the probable change state shifts to the non-probability change state through the jackpot gaming state, but as described above, the player continues in the probabilistic change state. Since there is a tendency to desire to do so, there is a strong tendency to play the game so that the hold on the hold display symbol C is not digested. For this reason, by displaying the on-hold display symbol C, it is possible to strongly guide the player to a game mode in which a game is played aiming at entering the second operation port 25b.

In the above description, when the sub-control device 200 receives the first operation port entry command A, the hold display symbol A is displayed, and when the sub control device 200 receives the first operation port entry command B, the display is on hold. Although it demonstrated as what displays the symbol B, you may display a common holding | maintenance display symbol by the case where the 1st operation port entrance command A is received, and the case where the 1st operation port entrance command B is received. .
For example, when either the first operation port entry command A or the first operation port entry command B is received, a predetermined probability (for example, 50% probability) is shown in FIG. 50 (b). As shown, a design symbol (hold display symbol D) with a question mark in a circle may be displayed.

As described above, if the hold display symbol D is displayed both in the case of receiving the first operation port entry command A and in the case of receiving the first operation port entry command B, the player Is
Whether the hold corresponding to the hold display symbol D is a hold that wins a jackpot in any game state of the non-probability change state and the probability change state (hold corresponding to the operation entrance command A),
Hold to win the jackpot only in the probable state (hold corresponding to the action entrance ball command B)
It becomes difficult to judge whether it is. As described above, the decision whether or not to hold the hold differs between the hold that wins the jackpot in both the non-probability state and the probability change state and the hold that wins the jackpot only in the case of the probability change state. When the hold display symbol D is displayed, the player determines whether the hold corresponds to the hold and determines whether to hold the hold. Accordingly, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of playing a game while predicting which hold is applicable. In addition, since the player digests the hold on the hold display symbol D while paying attention to whether the predicted result is correct, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, in addition to the first operation port entry command A and the first operation port entry command B, a common hold display symbol may be displayed for the first operation port entry command C as well. That is, the first operation entrance command A, the first operation entrance command B, the first operation entrance command C
If any of the above is received, the same hold display symbol is displayed with a predetermined probability. For example, as shown in FIG. 50C, a design symbol (holding display symbol E) with two question marks in a circle may be displayed. As described above, the first operation entrance command A
And the first operation port entering command B corresponds to the probability variation jackpot (step S in FIG. 41).
1754, step S1758, and step S1760), and the jackpot corresponding to the first operation port entrance command C is not a probable bonus jackpot. There is a big difference between whether or not a promiscuous jackpot and a big jackpot (usually a big jackpot) will be in a probable state after the jackpot game, so depending on whether or not to hold the hold on the hold display symbol E, the situation of the subsequent game Is greatly affected. Therefore, since it is important for the player to predict which of the hold corresponding to the hold display symbol D is a hold corresponding to which command, the player is more concentrated on the prediction. In this way, by preserving the hold display symbol for the hold corresponding to the probability change jackpot and the hold corresponding to the jackpot other than the probability change jackpot, it is possible to predict which hold the common hold display symbol corresponds to. In addition, it is possible to strongly attract the player's consciousness, and it is possible to greatly improve the interest of the game.

Whether such a common hold display symbol (hold display symbol D or hold display symbol E) is displayed, or a hold display symbol associated with each command (hold display symbol A, hold display symbol B, hold) Whether to display the display symbol C) may be determined by lottery. Such a lottery can be executed by various methods, and any method may be used. Further, the probability that the hold display symbol A is selected in the lottery (the probability in the lottery) and the hold display symbol D
Is selected arbitrarily (probability in the lottery), for example, a probability that the holding display symbol A is selected (probability in the lottery) and a probability that the holding display symbol D is selected (probability in the lottery). Setting the same level is preferable because any of the hold display symbols can be displayed with the same frequency.

In the above description, in the case of common winning hold, the hold display symbol with the word “Keikyo” is displayed, and in the case of probability variation limited winning hold, the hold with the character “Probable” is given. It has been described that characters indicating the hold type are attached to the hold display design, such as displaying a display design. However, the hold display symbol does not necessarily need to be a symbol that clearly indicates the hold type in this way, and may be any symbol as long as it can be distinguished from other hold display symbols.
For example, you may use the design which designed living things, such as a turtle, a whale, and an octopus. Even in such a case, if the respective holding display symbols can be distinguished from each other, the player knows in advance which holding type and jackpot type each holding display symbol corresponds to. Similar to the case of the hold display symbol in which the jackpot type is displayed, it is possible to determine how to advance the game based on the hold display symbol.

As described above, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the hold display effect that displays the hold display symbol corresponding to the jackpot type or the hold type in the hold display area of the effect display device 30. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. Here, the process of determining the hold display symbol to be displayed based on the jackpot type or the hold type is an operation entrance ball command setting process (FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 100.
And (see FIG. 41). And since the operation entrance ball command setting process is executed using the remaining time of the main loop process, even if it takes time to set the operation entrance ball command, each process in the main loop process In addition, there is no possibility of hindering each process in the timer interrupt process. Thereby, in the ball and ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to greatly improve the interest of the game by determining the presentation mode based on the jackpot type or the hold type, but the situation in which the progress of the game is hindered Thus, it is possible to control the game stably by avoiding the problem.

G. Modified example:
Below, the modification of the Example mentioned above is demonstrated. In the following description of the modified examples, the same reference numerals as those in the embodiment are assigned to the same configurations as those in the above-described embodiment, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.
G-1. First modification:
In the “holding display effect” of the ball and ball game machine 10 of the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the player desires to advance the game in a certain change state. However, by providing an advantage for the player in the non-probability state over the probabilistic state, it is also possible to make the player want to advance the game in the non-probability state. It is.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing the characteristics of the first modified example of the ball game machine in which the non-change probability state is more advantageous than the probability change state. FIG. 51A shows the jackpot probability in the probability variation state and the jackpot probability in the non-probability variation state, respectively. As shown, the first
Also in the ball game machine 10 of the modified example, the jackpot probability in the non-probable change state is set to “about 1/300” as in the case of the ball game machine of the above-described embodiment, The jackpot probability is set to “about 1/30”, which is about 10 times higher than that. Therefore, as for the jackpot probability, the probability variation state is more advantageous for the player as in the above-described embodiment. However, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the first modified example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the high support mode of the electric accessory 41 after the jackpot game is a probable big hit, “5 times ”, But after a big hit, the game times are about 20 times more than that.
It is set to continue until “0 times”.

Furthermore, in the ball game machine 10 of the first modified example, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the opening time, closing time, and number of opening times in the high support mode are greatly advantageous compared to the low support mode. Is set. That is, for the low support mode, the opening time is set to “0.2 seconds”, the closing time is set to “29.5 seconds”, and the number of opening times for one support win is set to “1”. (See step S1524 in FIG. 34 for the opening time in the low support mode of the above-described embodiment, see step S1474 in FIG. 33 for the closing time, and step S1480 in FIG. 33 for the number of opening times). See). In contrast, in the high support mode, the opening time is set to “5 seconds”, which is longer than the opening time “1.6 seconds” (see step S1522 in FIG. 34) of the above-described embodiment. The electric accessory 41 is kept in the open state. The closing time of the electric accessory 41 is set to “1 second” shorter than the closing time “1.5 seconds” (see step S1458 in FIG. 33) of the above-described embodiment. Even if it is closed, it returns to the open state immediately. Furthermore, the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 41 for one support winning is set to “5 times”, which is larger than “3 times” (see step S1464 in FIG. 33) of the above-described embodiment.

Thus, in the high support mode, when the support lottery is won, the electric accessory 41 opens and closes many times, and the opening time of the electric accessory 41 is long and the closing time is short. The time that is in the open state occupies a large proportion of the total time (the sum of the open time and the close time). Thereby, in the high support mode, it becomes possible for a game ball to easily enter the second operation port 25b, and as a result, a lottery lottery that is triggered by entering the second operation port 25b is frequently performed. It will be. On the other hand, in the low support mode, as in the above-described embodiment, the opening time is short and the closing time is long, and the electric accessory 41 is opened only once for one support win. The jackpot lottery is not performed as often as the mode.

Here, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), in the ball game machine 10 of the first modified example, after the normal jackpot game (the game state is a non-probability change state), after the probability change jackpot game (the game state is Since the high support mode is maintained for a greater number of games than the probability variation state), more game balls enter the second operation port 25b, and accordingly, lots of jackpot lotteries are also performed. Become. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), although the jackpot probability is lower in the non-probabilistic state than in the probabilistic state, the number of times that the jackpot lottery is performed triggered by entering the second operating port 25b is included. And, it becomes easier to win a big hit in the non-probability variation state than in the probability variation state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 51, the high support mode is executed in the non-probability change state over a period 20 times longer than that in the probability change state, so that roughly 20 times as many jackpot lotteries can be executed. Of course, even in the probability change state, since the high support mode ends and the low support mode is switched, the player may enter the second operating port 25b. Since entering the operating port 25b is not as easy as in the high support mode, the number of lottery lotteries in the probability variation state does not increase significantly.
As a result, in the non-probable variation state, the low probability of jackpot (about one tenth of the probability variation state) is compensated,
It becomes possible to create a state where it is easier to win a jackpot than a certain change state. Thus, by increasing the number of game times that continue in the high support mode in the non-probability variable state, the ratio of the number of game times that continue in the high support mode (ratio between the non-probability change state and the probability change state, example of FIG. 51 Then about 20 times)
If the product of the jackpot probability of the non-probabilistic state is greater than the jackpot probability of the probabilistic state, in the non-probable state, although the jackpot probability is lower than the probabilistic state, it is easy to win the jackpot In that respect, the non-probability state is more advantageous for the player.

In addition, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the first modified example, as with the ball ball game machine of the above-described embodiment, when a game ball enters the second operation port 25b, a prize ball is paid out with respect to the ball entered. (See step S1630 in FIG. 36). Accordingly, while the high support mode continues, the game balls enter the second operating port 25b and the winning balls are paid out one after another, so that the player continues to play the game without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls. It is possible. In the ball game machine 10 of the first modified example, the high support mode continues for a longer time in the non-probable change state (see FIG. 51 (b)). The probability variation state is more advantageous for the player. Thus, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the first modified example, the non-probability change state is more advantageous from the viewpoint of winning the big hits and not reducing the hand-held game balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player desire to advance the game in an uncertain change state.

Also, for the ball and ball game machine 10 in which the player wants to advance the game in an uncertain change state, various hold display symbols are displayed in the hold display area of the effect display device 30 as in the above-described embodiment. By doing so (see FIG. 49 and FIG. 50), it is possible to guide the player to a specific game mode. Here, in the ball and ball game machine of the embodiment described above, while the game state is in a probabilistic state and in the high support mode, it has been described that each hold display symbol of the hold display symbol A to the hold display symbol E is displayed. In the ball game machine 10 of the first modified example, it is assumed that each of these on-hold display symbols is displayed while the gaming state is in the uncertain change state and in the high support mode.

In order to display these hold display symbols only in the non-probable change state and the high support mode as described above, the probability change state flag is reset in the switching process at the end of the open / close mode (see FIGS. 30 and 31). When the high support mode flag is set (see step S1422 and step S1424 in FIG. 31), a special advantageous state start command is transmitted to the sub-control device 200. Also, a special advantageous state end command is transmitted to the sub-control device 200 when the jackpot gaming state for the probable change jackpot ends. In this way, the sub-control device 200
Then, when the special advantageous state start command is received, display of the hold display symbols A to D is started on the effect display device 30, and when the special advantageous state end command is received, these hold display symbols are displayed as normal hold display symbols. By changing to, it is possible to display the hold display symbols A to D on the effect display device 30 only in the non-probable state and in the high support mode.

When the hold display symbol A is displayed in the non-probable change state (see FIG. 49 (b)), the jackpot corresponding to the hold display symbol A is a probable change jackpot. When a big hit occurs, the game state becomes a probabilistic state after the big hit, so that the player plays the game aiming to enter the second operation port 25b so as not to consume the hold on the hold display symbol A. It will be. As described above, even when there is a tendency to desire to advance the game in the non-probable change state, it is possible to guide the player to a specific game mode by displaying the hold display symbol A. Further, the ball ball game machine 10 of the first modified example is similar to the ball ball game machine of the above-described embodiment (a ball game machine in which a player tends to play a game while desiring a certain change state). Since the player can play the game while considering how to proceed with the game according to the displayed on-hold display symbol, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of playing the game while considering how to proceed with the game.

Also, by displaying the hold display symbol B (see FIG. 49 (c)), it is possible to guide the player to a specific game mode and how to advance the game according to the displayed hold display symbol. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of playing a game while thinking. In other words, since the hold on the hold display symbol B wins the jackpot only in the probability change state (see step S1756 and step S1760 in FIG. 41), the hold on the hold display symbol B is digested in the non-probability change state. If this happens, the player will miss the jackpot that has been won. Therefore, the player plays a game aiming to enter the second operation port 25b. In particular, the player usually wants to avoid missing the jackpot as much as possible, so that the holding of the second operating port 25b is not exhausted and the holding of the first operating port 25a is not digested. It concentrates on the game which aims at the 2nd operation port 25b. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract a player strongly to a game.

In addition, although the hold display symbol B may be digested after shifting to the probability change state, as described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the first modified example, the hold table symbol B is not displayed in the probability change state.
When the state changes to the probability change state, the hold display symbol B changes to a normal hold display symbol B (see FIG. 49A). Therefore, the player proceeds with the game in a state in which one of the hold display areas of the effect display device 30 has a hold corresponding to the jackpot. As a result, the player's consciousness can be more strongly attracted to the game.

As described above, the special advantageous state end command is transmitted to the sub-control device 200 when the jackpot gaming state with the probability variation jackpot ends, but when the jackpot gaming state is started, the sub-control device 200 transmits It is good also as what to do. In this case, while the jackpot game with the probability variation jackpot is being performed, the special advantageous state end command has already been received by the sub-control device 200, so that a normal hold display symbol is displayed. For this reason, during the jackpot game, the player advances the game in a state in which which hold in the hold display area is stored corresponding to the jackpot. In the jackpot game state, the player's interest in the game may be reduced due to the relief of winning the jackpot. It is.

Even when the hold display symbol C is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while considering how to proceed with the game, like the hold display symbol A and the hold display symbol B described above. In other words, the hold on the hold display symbol C usually corresponds to the jackpot type of 15R jackpot (see step S1754 and step S1762 in FIG. 41). While being able to win, the player can recognize that the normal state can be continued after the big hit game. Accordingly, it is only necessary to release the hold on the hold display symbol C by launching the game ball in a state where the aim is removed from the second operation port 25b or stopping the launch of the game ball. Thus, even when the hold display symbol C is displayed, the player can play a game while considering how to proceed with the game according to the hold display symbol, and as a result, the game can be further enjoyed. .

In the ball game machine 10 of the first modified example, even if the reserved display symbol C is digested, there may be a case where the jackpot is not won. That is, not only when the holding type of holding corresponding to the holding display symbol C is common winning holding (holding that wins in both non-probability change state and probability change state),
Also in the case of the probability variation limited winning hold, the first action entrance command C for displaying the hold display symbol C is transmitted (see FIG. 41), and the hold display symbol C is displayed. As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the first modified example, the hold display symbol C is displayed during the non-probable change state. Therefore, when the hold type is the probability change limited winning hold, the hold display symbol C is held. Even if you digest, you won't win a jackpot. For this reason, the player digests the hold display symbol C hold while paying attention to whether or not the big hit is generated as intended. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract a player's interest by a game.

Further, also in the ball game machine 10 of the first modified example, as in the above-described embodiment, the hold display symbol D (see FIG. 50 (b)) and the hold display symbol E (see FIG. 50 (c)). ) Can be displayed. In such a case, as in the above-described embodiment, the player plays the game while predicting which jackpot type or hold type the displayed hold display symbol D or hold display symbol E corresponds to. It is possible to attract interest to the game and improve the interest of the game.

Thus, also in the ball ball game machine 10 of the first modified example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by performing the hold display effect as in the above-described embodiment. And first
Also in the ball game machine 10 of the modified example, by setting an operation entrance ball command for performing the hold display effect using the remaining time of the main loop process, each process in the main loop process and timer interruption It is possible to avoid the possibility of hindering each process in the process.
Thereby, also about the ball ball game machine 10 of the 1st modification, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the progress of the game will be disturbed while greatly enhancing the interest of the game by the hold display effect.

In the description of the ball game machine 10 of the first modification described above, it has been described that the hold display symbols A to E are displayed during the high support mode in the non-probability change state. These hold display symbols may be displayed during the support mode. In such a case, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, the hold display symbol A (
49 (b)) is displayed, the hold for the hold display symbol A wins a big hit in both the probable state and the normal state, so the player changes the hold display symbol A. It is not necessary to digest in a state, and it can be considered that digestion should be performed after shifting to a non-probable state. Or conversely, since the jackpot corresponding to the hold display symbol A is a probabilistic jackpot, it will return to the probabilistic state again when digested after becoming a non-probable change state (a gaming state that the player thinks is advantageous to him). It is also possible to think about digesting in a state. In this way, the player can think about how to proceed with the game in accordance with the hold display symbol A, and as a result, it is possible to enjoy the pleasure of playing the game while considering how to proceed with the game.

In addition, when the hold display symbol B (see FIG. 49 (c)) is displayed during the probability change state, the hold for the hold display symbol B wins a big hit only in the probability change state. It is possible to think of digesting in a state. Or hold display design B
The jackpot corresponding to is a promising jackpot, so if you want to move to a non-probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player as soon as possible and do not want the promiscuous state to continue, you can digest the holding for the display symbol B It is also possible to think not to. In addition, when the hold display symbol C (see FIG. 50 (a)) is displayed during the probability changing state, the hold display symbol C usually corresponds to a big jackpot. Since the person can shift to an uncertain change state that is advantageous for him, the game ball is fired with the aim removed from the second operation port 25b, or the game ball is stopped, and the suspended display graphic C is applied. What is necessary is just to make a reservation digest. As described above, even when the hold display symbol B or the hold display symbol C is displayed during the probability change state, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of playing a game while considering how to advance the game. Similarly, the hold display symbol D and the hold display symbol E (FIG. 50 (b) and FIG. 50 (c)
)) Is also displayed, the player plays the game while predicting which hold type or jackpot type corresponds to the hold display symbol, so the player's interest is attracted to the game. It is possible to improve the interest.

In order to cause the player to have a tendency to advance the game in an uncertain change state, the following method may be used in addition to the method of the first modification described above (see FIG. 51). . For example, if you win a jackpot in a non-probable state and win a jackpot in a promiscuous state, the number of winning balls that can be won by the jackpot game is greater when you win a jackpot in a non-probable state. Just keep it. As a method for this, it is assumed that different allocation tables are referred to in the case of the probability variation state and in the case of the non-probability variation state, and in the distribution table for the non-probability variation state, the proportion allocated to the 15R jackpot is set for the probability variation state. It may be set higher than the sorting table. In this way, it is easy to generate a big hit with a larger number of rounds in the non-probability change state, so the expected number of winning balls obtained by the jackpot game generated in the non-probability change state is higher than the jackpot game in the probabilistic state It becomes possible to do.

For example, the jackpot probability of the probability variation state is “1/30”, and the jackpot probability of the non-probability variation state is “3”.
The ratio of the 15R jackpot of the distribution table in the probability variation state is set to “5%”, and the ratio of the 15R jackpot of the distribution table in the non-probability variation state is set to “100%”. In this way, in the probability variation state, the probability of winning the 15R jackpot is 1/600 (“1/30” and “
On the other hand, in the non-probable state, the probability of winning the 15R jackpot is 1/300 (product of "1/300" and "100%"), so many prize balls Can be obtained 1
This is more likely to occur when the 5R jackpot is in an uncertain variation state. As a result, the non-probability variation state is advantageous for the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game. Thus, the product of the ratio of the jackpot type (15R jackpot in this example) that can be expected to play and the jackpot probability is
By setting the ratio of jackpot probability and jackpot type so that the non-probability change state becomes larger, the expected value of the number of winning balls obtained by the jackpot game in the non-probability state is set to the jackpot game in the probability change state It becomes possible to do more.

Or, more simply, the number of prize balls for the large entrance 60 may be different in the case of the non-probability change state and the case of the probability change state (for example, in the jackpot game that occurred in the non-probability change state, “15” and the number of award balls is set to “10” in the jackpot game generated in the probability variation state). This also makes it possible to increase the expected value of the number of winning balls for the jackpot game in the jackpot in the non-probable change state than in the jackpot in the probabilistic state.

Alternatively, as in the case of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of operation ports 25 are provided and different distribution tables (see FIG. 11) are referred to at the respective operation ports, the probability variation state is in the non-probability variation state. In addition to providing an operating port that makes it easier to enter the ball,
The ratio of 5R jackpot (a jackpot that can be expected to appear) is set to a value higher than the ratio of 15R jackpot (a jackpot that can be expected to appear) in the sorting table of the other operation ports. As described above, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the electric accessory 41 is in the open state, it is possible to create a state where it is easy to enter the second operating port 25b. In some cases, the electric accessory 41 is left open for a longer time than in the case of the probability change state (for example,
In the probability variation state, it is hardly opened, or even if it is opened, it is set to “1 second”, while in the non-probability variation state, it is opened for “5 seconds”), or the electric accessory 41 is opened. By increasing the number of times more than in the probability variation state, it is possible to make it easier to enter the second operating port 25b in the non-probability variation state than in the probability variation state. By doing so, more jackpot lotteries resulting from entering the second operating port 25b are performed, and therefore the probability of being distributed to 15R jackpot (a jackpot that can be expected to come out) is surely changed (to the second operating port 25b). As a result, it is possible to increase the expected value of the number of balls in the jackpot game in the non-probable change state than in the probabilistic state.

For example, if the jackpot probability of the non-probability change state is “1/300”, the jackpot probability of the non-probability change state is “1/30”, the 15R jackpot of the sorting table for the second operating port 25b (the jackpot that can be expected to appear) ) Is set to “100%”, and the ratio of 15R jackpot (a jackpot that can be expected to appear) in the sorting table for the first working port 25a is set to “5%”. in this case,
In the non-probability state, a big hit lottery is performed mainly by entering the second operating port 25b.
The probability of winning a 15R jackpot (a jackpot that can be expected to appear) in an uncertain state is approximately 3
1/00 "(product of" 1/300 "and" 100% "). On the other hand, in the probability variation state,
Since it is more difficult to enter the second operating port 25b than in the uncertain change state, the big hit lottery by entering the first operating port 25a will be mainly performed. The probability of winning the winning jackpot is approximately “1/600” (“1/30” and “5%”)
Product). In this way, an operating port that is easy to enter in a non-probable change state is provided, and in the distribution table of the operating port, the ratio of the jackpot (15R jackpot in this embodiment) that can be expected to be taken out is calculated as the ratio of other operating ports. By making it higher than the distribution table (by making the product of the jackpot probability greater than the probability variation state), the probability of jackpot occurrence that can be expected from the ball is more probable in the non-probability state. Can be higher. As a result, the expected value of the number of winning balls obtained by the jackpot game can be made higher in the non-probable variation state than in the probabilistic variation state. With these various methods, if the number of winning balls in the jackpot game in the non-probable state is set to be larger than the jackpot game in the probabilistic state, It is possible to generate a tendency to advance the game in a non-probable state.

Or it is good also as what makes the easiness of entering a ball into an operation port more advantageous in a non-probability change state. As described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, this is achieved by switching the operation mode of the electric accessory 41 provided in the vicinity of the second operation port 25b between the non-probability change state and the probability change state. Is easily realizable. In other words, the high support mode by the electric accessory 41 described above may be executed in a mode in which entering in the non-probability change state is easier than in the probability change state. For example, the opening time of the electric accessory 41 may be set to a longer time in the non-probable state than in the probabilistic state (for example,
The non-probability state is set to “5 seconds” and the probabilistic state is set to “0.5 seconds”. Alternatively, the closing time of the electric accessory 41 is set to be shorter than that in the non-probability state (for example, In the non-probability change state, “0.5 seconds” is set, and in the probability change state, “5 seconds” is set). Alternatively, the electric accessory 41 is opened and closed more times in the non-probability change state than in the probability change state. Furthermore,
The winning probability of the support lottery that is triggered by entering the through operating port 24 is higher in the non-probable state than in the probabilistic state (for example, the winning probability in the non-probable state is set to “90%”). The probability of winning in the probability variation state is set to “30%”), or the number of opening and closing of the electric accessory 41 when winning in the support lottery may be increased in the non-probability variation state ( "3 times" in non-probability state, "1 time" in probability change state). In this way, in the non-probability change state, it is easier to enter the second operating port 25b than in the probability change state. As a result, the player who wants more game balls to enter the operation port and perform more jackpot lotteries feels more advantageous in the non-probable state. It is possible to cause the player to tend to advance the game.

In general, players tend to want to win more prize balls. Therefore, if a player pays a prize ball for entering a working slot, the player can play a game in an uncertain state. It is possible to generate a stronger tendency to proceed. In such a case, the second operating port 25
The number of prize balls for entering the ball b may be larger than that of the first operation port 25a. In the embodiment and the first modification described above, “3” prize balls are paid out for entering the first working port 25a, and “4” for entering the second working port 25b. However, the number of prize balls for entering the second operation port 25b is increased, for example, the number of prize balls in the second operation port 25b is about twice that of the first operation port 25a. (The number of prize balls in the first operating port 25a is set to “2” and the second operating port 2
The prize ball of 5b may be “4”. Since it is easier to enter the second operating port 25b in the non-probable state, the tendency to desire the non-probable state is further increased by increasing the number of winning balls in the second operating port 25b in this way. It is possible to strengthen.

Furthermore, if a sufficient number of prize balls are paid out for entering the second operating port 25b, a ball that only compensates for the low probability of jackpot in the non-probable change state is supplied to the second operating port 25b. It is also possible to obtain a prize ball for entry. For example, in the case of a probable change state, considering that there is a high probability that a jackpot will be generated at least once, the same number of prize balls as the number of prize balls obtained by one jackpot game is sent to the second operation port 25b. It can be obtained by entering the ball. The total number of prize balls that can be obtained by entering the second working port 25b can be set by adjusting the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 41, the number of prize balls of the second working port 25b, and the like. In other words, the non-probability change state is activated in the second operation by changing the opening time and the number of releases of the electric accessory 41 between the non-probability change state and the probability change state, or by changing the number of game times in which the high support mode continues. It is easy to enter the mouth 25b. In addition, the total number of game balls that enter more than the probability variation state and the number of prize balls of the second operation port 25b is approximately the same as the number of prize balls of one big hit game. Set it. For example, as described above, the high support mode after the jackpot game is continued until the game times are performed “5 times” in the probability variation state, and until the game times are performed “100 times” in the non-probability variation state. In the non-probability change state, it is assumed that as many game balls as “200 balls” enter the second operation port 25b with respect to the probability change state. In this case, the number obtained by multiplying the “200 balls” by the number of prize balls of the second operating port 25b is approximately the same as the number of prize balls of one jackpot game (for example, “1000 balls”). What is necessary is just to set the number of prize balls of the 2nd operation port 25b. In this way, although the probability of winning the jackpot in the non-probable change state is low, it is possible to obtain a prize ball that compensates for the low probability by entering the second operating port 25b. It is possible to cause the player to tend to advance the game.

Note that, from the viewpoint of causing the player to desire a non-probability variation state, the expected value of the non-probability variation ball need not necessarily exceed the expected value of the probability variation ball. That is, even if the expected value of the number of balls is lower in the non-probable change state, some players may feel that the non-probable change state is more advantageous. For example, as described above, when it is easy to enter the second operating port 25b, the player is playing a game ball by playing a game, but the winning ball for entering the second operating port 25b It is difficult to reduce the number of game balls on hand. In particular, the product of the number of game balls reaching the second operation port 25b per unit time and the number of prize balls of the second operation port 25b is approximately the same as the number of game balls reaching the out port 50 per unit time. By setting the number of winning balls for the second operating port 25b as described above, it is possible to create a situation where the number of game balls held by the player is hardly reduced. In this case, since the player is less likely to run out of his or her own game balls, he can play with peace of mind, so depending on the player, even if the expected value of the ball is small, this state Some players want to play games. For these reasons, it is not always necessary that the expected value of the ball in the non-probable change state exceeds the probability change state. Of course, if the expected value of the ball in the non-probability change state actually exceeds the probability change state, the tendency to play a game in the non-probability change state can be more prominently generated.

G-2. Second modification:
In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the on-hold counter information stored in the hold storage area 142 is referred to when setting the operation port entry command (step S1724 in FIG. 40).
And step S1728). However, a storage area different from the holding storage area 142 may be provided in the RAM 140, and the operation entry ball command may be set with reference to the holding counter information stored in the storage area.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the configuration of the latest reserved storage area 160 which is a storage area provided separately from the reserved storage area 142. As shown in the figure, in the most recently reserved storage area 160, a jackpot random number storage area 160b that can store the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a and a jackpot type storage area 16 that can store the value of the jackpot type counter 141c.
0c is provided. In addition, an operating port information storage area 160a is also provided, and by setting a flag in the operating port information storage area 160a, it is possible to store the operating port where the suspension has occurred. In the latest pending storage area 160, the value of each counter is stored as follows.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a flow of information acquisition processing of the second modified example. As described above, the information acquisition process is a process that is executed in the operation entrance ball entry process (see step S1604 in FIG. 35) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 35) (operation entrance entrance ball in FIG. 36). (See step S1626 or step S1634 of the process), and when there is a ball entering the operating port, it is a process of receiving this and acquiring the value of the on-hold acquisition counter group.

Also in the information acquisition process of the second modified example, as in the information acquisition process of the above-described embodiment, after specifying the operation port to be processed (FIG. 53: step S1650), the number of holds of each operation port is updated. Process. First, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings for each operating port has reached the upper limit value (step S1652 or step S1660). If the upper limit value has not been reached, the number of holdings for each operating port is counted up ( Step S1654 or Step S1
662), the total number of reservations is counted up (step S1656 or step S16).
64). Then, each value of the on-hold acquisition counter group is stored in the hold storage area 142 (step S1658 or step S1666).

Here, in the information acquisition process of the second modified example, when the value of the on-hold acquisition counter group is stored in the hold storage area 142, the same value is also stored in the nearest hold storage area 160 of FIG. S1668). That is, the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is stored in the jackpot random number storage area 160b of the latest pending storage area 160, and the jackpot type counter 14
The value of 1c is stored in the jackpot type storage area 160c of the latest pending storage area 160. Further, the operation port information storage area 160 indicates whether the counter value stored in the latest holding storage area 160 corresponds to the entry into the first operation port 25a or the second operation port 25b.
Store in a (step S1670). That is, if the value of the counter is acquired for the entry into the first operation port 25a, the first operation port flag is set in the operation port information storage area 160a, and the entry into the second operation port 25b is performed. On the other hand, if the counter value is acquired, the second working port flag is set in the working port information storage area 160a. In the ball game machine 10 of the second modified example, using the value of the counter thus stored in the latest holding storage area 160, the operation entrance ball command is set as follows.

FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the operation inlet ball command setting process of the second modification. As described above, the operation port entry command setting process is executed in the remaining time process (see FIG. 39) (see step S1706), and is a process of setting the operation port entry command to be transmitted to the sub-control device 200. is there. Also in the operation port entry command setting process of the second modified example, as in the operation port entry command setting process (see FIG. 40) of the above-described embodiment, first, the operation port where the entry was made is determined. Then, the process is branched according to the operation port (FIG. 54: step S1720).
. If the operation port 25 that has entered the ball is the second operation port 25b (step S1720: No),
The second operation port entry command is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1732).
On the other hand, if the working port where the ball has entered is the first working port 25a (step S1720: Yes).
Similarly to the operation entrance ball command setting process of the above-described embodiment, a process for specifying the jackpot type and the hold type is performed based on the on-hold counter information.

Here, in the operation opening ball command setting process of the second modification, the jackpot type and the hold type are specified with reference to the latest hold storage area 160. First, the value of the jackpot random number storage area 160b is acquired with reference to the latest hold storage area 160 (step S1725), and the hold type is specified by referring to the hold type table (see FIG. 42) (FIG. 54). : Step S1726). Next, the value of the jackpot type storage area 160c is acquired with reference to the most recently reserved storage area 160 (step S1729), and a distribution table (FIG. 11).
The jackpot type is specified with reference to (see step S1730). After the hold type and the jackpot type are specified in this way, the processing shown in FIG. 41 is performed in the same manner as the operation entrance ball command setting process of the embodiment described above to set the operation entrance ball command.

As described above, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the second modified example, the value of the big hit random number counter 141a and the value of the big hit type counter 141c are stored in the nearest hold storage area 160 provided separately from the hold storage area 142. When setting the operation port entry command, the latest holding storage area 160 is referred to, and the value of the counter area 141 acquired at the time of entry and the value of the big hit type counter 141c are acquired. In this way, when setting the operation hole entry command, since the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a corresponding to the latest entry and the value of the jackpot type counter 141c are stored in the nearest hold storage area 160, these In order to obtain the value of the storage area, it is only necessary to refer to the latest reserved storage area 160, and the storage area corresponding to the latest entry from the plurality of storage areas (first area to fourth area) of the reserved storage area 142. There is no need to specify. For this reason, it is possible to simplify the process of creating the action entrance command.
As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing burden on the MPU 102 and more reliably avoid the possibility of trouble in game control.

In addition, when setting the operation entrance ball command, since it is only necessary to refer to the latest holding storage area 160, it is not necessary to access the numerical value stored in the holding storage area 142 many times. Since the numerical value stored in the reserved storage area is used to determine whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful, from the viewpoint of preventing the numerical value from being read or altered by an illegal act, the reserved storage area 1
It may not be desirable to access 42 many times. In this respect, it is preferable to refer to the latest reserved storage area 160 in this way because the reserved storage area 142 need not be accessed many times.

When storing the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a or the value of the jackpot type counter 141c in the nearest hold storage area 160, the value is read from the jackpot random number counter 141a or the jackpot type counter 141c and stored in the nearest hold storage area 160. However, instead of directly reading the values from these counters, the values stored in the reserved storage area 142 may be read and stored. That is, as described above, since the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a and the value of the jackpot type counter 141c are stored in the hold storage area 142 (see step S1658 or step S1666), the hold storage area 1
These values can be obtained from 42. In this way, the jackpot random number counter 1
Since it is not necessary to access 41a and the jackpot type counter 141c many times, MPU1
The processing burden of 02 can be reduced. Alternatively, the jackpot random number counter 141a
When the values are acquired from the jackpot type counter 141c, these values are stored in the general-purpose area 146.
It is also possible to store the value in this buffer and refer to this buffer when storing the value in the latest pending storage area 160. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the number of times the reserved storage area 142 is accessed.

G-3. Third modification:
In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the operation entrance ball command is set in the remaining time processing executed in the remaining time (see step S1706 in FIG. 39). However, since the remaining time varies depending on the progress of the game, depending on the progress of the game, the remaining time may be shortened, and it may be difficult to spend a sufficient amount of time for the operation entry command setting process. . In view of these points, it may be determined based on the remaining time whether or not the setting process of the operation entrance ball command is performed.

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the remaining time process of the third modified example in which it is determined whether or not to execute the operation entrance ball command setting process based on the remaining time. As shown in the figure, in the remaining time process of the third modified example, as in the remaining time process of the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 39), first, the value of the random number initial value counter 141b and the variation type counter 141d The value is updated (step S1700, step S1702). Next, before executing the operation port entry command setting process, the time required for setting the operation port entry command is ascertained (step S180).
0).

Although the time required for the operation port entry command setting process can be grasped by various methods, the time required for the operation port entry command setting process is stored in the ROM 110 in advance and read from the ROM 110. Just put it out. At this time, when the required time varies depending on the operation port that is the target of the operation port entry command setting process, the required time for each operation port may be stored in the ROM 110. For example, in the operation port entry command setting process (see FIG. 40) of the above-described embodiment, when the operation port entry command is set for entering the first operation port 25a (step S1720: Yes). The time required for processing differs depending on the number of steps to be executed, depending on the case where the operation port entry command is set for entering the second operation port 25b (step S1720: No). In such a case, the first working port 25
Each time required for a and the second operation port 25b may be stored in the ROM 110, an operation port for processing may be specified, and the time required for the operation port may be acquired.

Once the time required for the operation entrance ball command setting process is grasped (FIG. 55: Step S1800)
), And then when the operation hole entering command setting process is executed, the main loop process (FIG. 13) is executed.
(See FIG. 55: Step S1802).
. The elapsed time from the start of execution of step S1000 of the main loop process is MPU10.
Since it is possible to grasp using the timer etc. prepared in 2 or not, it is determined whether or not the repetition period is exceeded based on this elapsed time and the required time for the operation entrance ball command setting process obtained previously. do it.

When it is determined that the repetition period is not exceeded (step S1802: Yes), the operation entrance ball command setting process may be performed. Therefore, similarly to the remaining time processing of the above-described embodiment, whether there is a ball to be dealt with in the operation entrance ball command setting process, or whether the operation entrance command has already been set. Based on the above, after finally determining whether or not the operation entrance ball command setting process is executed (step S1704), the operation entrance ball command setting process is executed (step S1706). On the other hand, if it is determined that the repetition period is exceeded (step S1802: No), the remaining time process is terminated.

In this way, it takes time for each process of the main loop process (see FIG. 13), and even if there is a situation in which only a short remaining time is left, the operation entry ball command is set. As a result, there is no delay in the repetition period of the main loop process, so that it is possible to reliably avoid the possibility that the game control will be hindered.

Note that when determining whether or not to execute the operation port entry command setting process according to the remaining time and the time required for the operation port entry command setting process, the operation entrance game processing (step S1604 in FIG. 35) is performed. Information acquisition processing (see step S1626 or step S1 in FIG. 36).
634) may be stored in the command buffer 145 temporarily. By doing so, even when the operation port entry command setting process is not executed, the operation port entry command can be appropriately transmitted to the sub-control device 200. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a flow of information acquisition processing of the third modified example in which a provisional operation port entry command is stored in the command buffer. In the information acquisition process of the third modified example, as in the information acquisition process of the above-described embodiment, it is determined whether the operation port to be processed is the first operation port 25a or the second operation port 25b (step S1650), the number of suspensions and the total number of suspensions of the operation ports to be processed are counted up (steps S1654, S1656, S1662, and S1664). Further, each value of the on-hold acquisition counter group is stored in a hold storage area corresponding to each operation port (step S1658, step S16).
66). Thereafter, in the information acquisition process of the third modified example, “
The “provisional first operation port entering command” or “provisional second operation port entering command” is stored in the command buffer 145 (steps S1659 and S1667). Note that such a temporary operation port entry command is stored in advance in the ROM 110 of the main control device 100, and R
It may be read from the OM 110 and stored in the command buffer 145.

Thus, if the provisional operation port entry command is stored in the command buffer 145, even if the operation entry command command setting process is not executed, the provisional operation port entry command is transmitted to the sub-control device 200. Can be sent to. As a result, the sub-control device 200 can surely grasp that the ball has entered the operation port based on the operation port entry command regardless of the remaining time of the main control device 100. . On the other hand, when executing the operation port entry command setting process, the provisional operation port entry command stored in the command buffer 145 is deleted and the operation set in the operation port entry command setting process is performed. The entrance ball command is stored in the command buffer 145. In this way, when there is time to execute the operation entrance command setting process, the operation entrance command including information on the hold type and the jackpot type can be set by the operation entrance command setting process. It becomes possible. As a result, in the sub control device 200, it is possible to surely know that there is a ball entering the operation port regardless of the remaining time in the main control device 100, and the sub control device 200 relates to the holding type and the jackpot type. When an operation entrance ball command including information is received, it is possible to determine the effect mode based on the hold type and the jackpot type.

In addition, since the information acquisition process described above is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 35), if the information acquisition process is complicated, the time required for the timer interrupt process increases. As a result, there may occur a case where the timer interrupt process cannot be executed at a predetermined time period. In this respect, if the process of storing the provisional operation entrance ball command prepared in advance in this way is performed in the command buffer, the complicated processing for setting the operation entrance ball command while referring to the on-hold counter information Therefore, the processing time of the timer interrupt process does not increase significantly. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the timer interrupt process cannot be executed at a predetermined time period.

In the sub-control device 200 that receives such a provisional operation port entry command, the operation port entry command response process (step S201 in FIG. 44) executed upon receipt of the operation port entry command.
2), the provisional operation entry command may be executed as follows.

FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 are flowcharts showing the flow of the processing for entering an entrance ball command according to the third modified example for processing a provisional entrance port command. As shown, the third
In the operation port entry command corresponding process of the modified example, first, whether or not the operation port entry command to be processed is the second operation entrance command, similarly to the operation entrance command response process of the above-described embodiment. Is determined (step S2030). If the operation port entry command to be processed is the second operation port entry command (step S2030: Yes), the second operation port retention number counter provided in the sub-control device 200 is the same as in the above-described embodiment. Is counted up (step S2048), and a second operating port hold increase command is transmitted to the display control device 300 (step S2050).

When the command to be processed is not the second operation entrance ball command (step S2030:
No) Next, it is determined whether or not the command to be processed is a “provisional second operation port entry command” (step S2031). That is, even if the command to be processed is not the second operation port entry command, if it is a provisional second operation port entry command, it is an operation port entry command corresponding to the entry into the second operation port. Therefore, if it is a provisional second operation port entry command (step S).
2031: Yes), the second working port holding number counter is counted up (step S2048) and the second working port holding increase command is transmitted to the display control device 300 as in the case of the second working port entering command. (Step S2050).

The command to be processed is not the second operation entrance command (step S2030: No)
If it is not the provisional second operation port entry command (step S2031: No), the command to be processed is the operation port entry command applied to the first operation port. Therefore, the sub-control device 200 counts up the value of the first working port hold number counter (step S203).
2). Next, since the “provisional first operation port entry command” may be sent from the main controller 100 in the operation port entry command response processing of the third modification, the command to be processed is the provisional first command. It is determined whether or not the command is a ball entry command (step S2200). Provisional first
In the case of an operation entrance ball command (step S2200: Yes), a command (hold increase command E) different from the case where a command other than the provisional first operation entrance command is received,
It transmits to the display control device 300.

As described above, when the provisional first operation entrance command is transmitted, detailed command setting processing (operation entrance entry command setting processing) based on the hold type or jackpot type is omitted. Therefore, when receiving the hold increase command E, the display control device 300 may determine the hold display symbol to be displayed on the effect display device 30 regardless of the hold type or the jackpot type. For example, a hold display symbol to be displayed may be determined by lottery from among the plurality of hold display symbols (hold display symbol A to hold display symbol D) described above, or may be displayed from among these hold display symbols. A hold display symbol may be determined in advance, and the hold display symbol may be displayed. Furthermore, a hold display symbol for the hold increase command E may be prepared, and when the hold increase command E is received, a hold display symbol for the hold increase command E may be displayed.

It should be noted that the hold increase command (hold increase command E
), And a hold increase command (hold increase command A to
It is also possible to share the pending increase command D). For example, when a provisional first operation port entry command is received, a hold increase command D may be transmitted to the display control device 300. In this way, the number of types of pending increase commands can be suppressed, so that it is possible to save the storage area of the sub-control device 200 that stores the commands. Of course, it is possible not to share with the hold increase command D but to share with the hold increase command A, the hold increase command B, or the hold increase command C.

In addition, in the case where the hold increase command is made common in this way, or when any hold display symbol is displayed for the provisional first operation port entry command, the hold type related to the provisional first operation entry command Is not accurately reflected in the hold display symbol, a hold display symbol different from the actual hold type may be displayed on the effect display device 30. However, since the provisional first operation port entry command is transmitted only when there is no time to execute the operation port entry command setting process, the frequency of occurrence of such a state is not so high. Therefore, even if a state in which the hold display symbol does not correspond to the hold type may occur, there is virtually no problem. On the other hand, if the state where the hold display symbol does not correspond to the hold type is generated even if it is rare, such a situation may occur when the player digests the hold on the hold display symbol. In order to digest the suspension while hoping that it will not occur, the game will be more concentrated. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player by game.

G-4. Fourth modification:
In the above-described remaining time processing of the embodiment and the modified example, it has been described that the operation entrance ball command setting processing is performed after updating the value of the random number initial value counter 141b and the value of the variation type counter 141d (see FIGS. 39 and 39). 55). However, on the contrary, the value of each counter may be updated after the operation entrance ball command setting process is executed.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the remaining time process flow of the fourth modified example in which the counter value is updated after the operation opening ball command is set. As shown in the figure, in the remaining time process of the fourth modified example, first, the time required for the operation opening ball command setting process is grasped (step S).
1820) Subsequently, when the operation entrance ball command setting process is executed based on the time required for the operation entrance ball command setting process and the remaining time, the repetition cycle of the main loop process (
It is determined whether or not (4 msec) is exceeded (step S1822). If it is determined that the repetition period is not exceeded (step S1822: Yes), whether or not the operation entrance ball command is set in the same manner as the remaining time process of the second modification described above (see FIG. 55). After the final determination is made (FIG. 59: Step S1824), the operation port entry command setting process is executed (Step S1826). In the remaining time process of the fourth modified example, after performing each process (step S1820 to step S1826) related to the operation opening ball command setting process, the value of the random number initial value counter 141b and the value of the variation type counter 141d are set. Update (step S1828, step S1830).

In this way, before the remaining time is consumed by the process of updating the random number initial value counter 141b and the variation type counter 141d, the operation entrance ball command setting process can be executed. In this way, if the setting process of the entry command for the operation entrance command is performed prior to the update process of the counter, the frequency at which the operation entry command setting process is not executed can be further suppressed. In many cases, it is possible to transmit the operation entrance ball command capable of grasping the jackpot type to the sub-control device 200.

In addition, when the operation entrance ball command setting process is executed in preference to the counter update process, it may happen that the time required for the counter update process is not sufficient. In view of these points, when the action opening ball command setting process is executed, the counter update process may be executed after determining whether or not there is a time for the counter setting process.
This point will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a remaining time processing flow for updating the counter after determining whether or not there is a time for updating the counter when the operation port entry command is executed. As for the remaining time process, similarly to the remaining time process of FIG. 59 described above, first, each process (step S1820 to step S1826) related to the operation opening ball command setting process is executed. Next, when the operation entrance ball command setting process is executed (step S182).
6) This time, when the value of the random number initial value counter 141b and the value of the variation type counter 141d are updated, it is determined whether or not the repetition period (4 msec) of the main loop process is exceeded. If it is determined that the repetition period is exceeded, the random number initial value counter 14
Without updating the value of 1b and the value of the variation type counter 141d, the remaining time processing is ended as it is (step S1827: No).

As described above, the random number initial value counter 141b and the variation type counter 141d have only to be updated so that the counter values are random, and are not necessarily updated every time the remaining time processing is performed. Therefore, even if the counter value is not updated during the remaining time processing as described above, no problem actually occurs.

On the other hand, if the repetition period is not exceeded (1827: No), the value of each counter may be updated (steps S1828 and S1830). In addition, when it is determined that the repetition period is exceeded when the operation opening ball command setting process is executed (step S1822: N
o) When the operation port entry command setting process is not executed (step S1824: N)
o) Since the time is not digested by the operation port entry command setting process, there is almost no possibility of repeating the cycle by updating the counter. Therefore, in these cases as well, the process of updating the value of each counter may be performed as it is (step S1828,
Step S1830).

In this way, by giving priority to the operation entrance ball command setting process over the counter update process, it is possible to set the operation entrance ball command in more cases, but there is no time to update the counter value. It is possible to reliably avoid the possibility of exceeding the repetition period of the main loop process.

G-5. Fifth modification:
In the above-described embodiments and modifications, it has been described that the command for performing the hold display effect is set in the remaining time processing. However, the command set in the remaining time processing is not limited to the command related to the hold display effect, and may be a command related to any effect. Further, it is not always necessary to use a command related to entering the operation port 25 (operation port entry command). For example, a command related to entering the through operation port 24 may be used. Also in the case of setting these various commands, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the control of the game will be hindered by performing the process of setting the commands for the remaining time. Hereinafter, as an example of processing for setting such a command, a modified example in which a command related to entering the through operation port 24 is set as the remaining time will be described.

FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the remaining time process flow of the fifth modified example for executing the through operation inlet ball command setting process. As shown in the figure, in the remaining time process of the fifth modification, first, the value of the random number initial value counter 141b and the value of the variation type counter 141d are updated as in the remaining time process of the above-described embodiment (step S1). S1700, step S17
02). Next, it is determined whether or not the through operation entrance ball command is set in the command buffer 145 (step S1850). If there is no entry in the through operation port 24 and there is no need to set a through operation entry command, or if there is an entry in the through operation port 24 but a command has already been set, the remaining time processing is continued. It may be completed (step S18).
50: No). On the other hand, when a command is set (step S1850: Yes), a “through operation port entering command setting process” described below is executed (step S1852).

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the flow of the through operation port entry command setting process.
In this process, a command is set based on the result of the support lottery for entering the through operation port 24, thereby transmitting the result of the support lottery to the sub-control device 200, and producing an effect according to the result of the support lottery. This is processing that can be executed in the sub-control device 200. As shown in the figure, when the process is started, first, referring to the electric accessory holding area 144,
The value of the electric accessory release counter 141f stored in the electric accessory holding area 144 is acquired (
Step S1870). That is, if there is a ball entering the through operation port 24, the value of the electric accessory release counter 141f is stored in the electric component holding area 144 by the through operation port entering process (see FIG. 38) (FIG. 38). In step S1686, the lottery value used for the support lottery is acquired by reading this value.

Next, a support lottery determination result for the value of the acquired electric accessory release counter 141f is acquired (step S1872). As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the electric accessory release counter 141f takes a numerical range from “0” to “249”
Among these, the numerical value range from “0” to “190” corresponds to the winning of support lottery (support winning). Therefore, it is possible to acquire the determination result of whether or not the support lottery is successful by determining whether or not the value of the acquired electric component release counter 141f is within this range. In the case of support winning (step S1874: Yes), a “support winning notification command” for notifying that a support lottery is won is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1876). “Not supported command” is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1878).
.

Thus, the command set in the command buffer 145 according to whether the support lottery is successful or not is transmitted to the sub-control device 200 in the external output process (FIG. 13: step S1000) of the main loop process described above. In response to this, the sub control device 200 executes an effect reflecting the result of the support lottery by switching the effect to be executed depending on whether the support winning notification command or the support failure notification command is received. It becomes possible.

In addition, the support winning notification command and the out-of-support notification command are also transmitted to the sub-control device 200 immediately after entering the through operation port 24 as in the case of the operation port entry command described above. The sub-control device 200 can grasp the result of the support lottery before the symbol variation display on the segment type display device 80 is started (while the through operation port is on hold). As a result, it is possible to reflect the result of the support lottery in the content of the performance performed while the through operation port is on hold, and to perform an effect such as raising the player's expectation for the result of the support lottery. It becomes possible to further improve. In addition, even in such a case, since the through operation entrance ball command setting process is performed for the remaining time, it is possible to avoid the possibility of hindering the game control. Thereby, it is possible to stably control the progress of the game while executing the effect reflecting the result of the support lottery to excite the game.

G-6. Sixth modification:
In the embodiment described above, the lottery value associated with the jackpot in the jackpot table for the non-probability change state is described as being associated with the jackpot in the jackpot lottery table for the probability change state (the broken line in FIG. 10). (See lottery numbers enclosed in brackets). However, on the contrary, the lottery value associated with the jackpot in the jackpot table for the non-probable variation state may not be associated with the jackpot in the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state.

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a jackpot lottery table of a sixth modified example in which lottery values associated with the jackpot are all different between the jackpot table for the non-probable variation state and the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state. As shown in FIG. 63A, in the jackpot lottery table for the uncertain change state, two lottery values “7” and “307” are associated with the jackpot (enclosed by broken lines in the figure). See the figure). Here, in the jackpot lottery table of the above-described embodiment, these two lottery values are associated with jackpots in the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state, but in the jackpot lottery table of the sixth modified example, FIG. As shown in b), these two lottery values are not associated with jackpots in the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state (see blanks shown by broken lines in the figure). If the jackpot lottery table is set in this way, each lottery value corresponding to the jackpot will correspond to the jackpot only in either the probability variation state or the non-probability variation state. It is possible to provide a lottery value that wins only a big win. In response to this,
The hold type table can be set as shown in FIG.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a hold type table of the sixth modified example in which “non-probability limited limited hold” is set as the hold type. As shown in the drawing, in the two numerical values “7” and “307” that win the jackpot only in the non-probable change state, the hold type is set to “non-probability limited limited hold”. In other words, when the suspension corresponding to these numerical values is exhausted, it means that the jackpot is won only when the gaming state is an uncertain change state.

Therefore, when setting the operation port entry command to be transmitted to the sub-control device 200 based on the hold type (refer to the operation port entry command setting process in FIG. 40), the command corresponding to this non-probability limited limited hold. By setting this, it is possible to transmit to the sub-control device 200 that the jackpot is won only in the case of the uncertain change state. As a result, the sub-control device 200 controls the display control device 300 in response to such a command, so that the hold display pattern indicating that the jackpot is won in the hold display area of the effect display device 30 only in an uncertain change state. Can be displayed. Even in such a case, the player can advance the game while judging how to advance the game according to the displayed on-hold display symbol, so that it is possible to improve the fun of the game. .

In addition, the hold display symbol (non-probability change limited hold display symbol) that wins the jackpot only in the non-probability change state may be displayed only when the gaming state is the probabilistic change state. In these cases,
If the non-probability limited hold display symbol is displayed, if the hold is consumed in the game state (probability change state) as it is, it will not be possible to win a jackpot. Accordingly, the player can prevent the hold from being consumed until the gaming state shifts to the uncertain change state.
In order to increase the holding of the second operating port 25b digested in preference to the holding of the second operating port 25
A game ball is launched aiming at entering into b. Since it is a situation that the player wants to avoid as much as possible that the winning of the jackpot is not possible, in such a case, the player must
Concentrate on games that aim to enter 5b. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract a player strongly to a game.

On the contrary, the non-probability change limited hold display symbol may be displayed only when the gaming state is the non-probability change state. In this case, when the non-probability change limited hold display symbol is displayed, it is possible to win a big win in the game state (probability change state) as it is, so that the player aims at the second operation port 25b to digest the hold. You can remove it and play a game. At this time, the second working port 25
If there is a hold of b, winning the jackpot in the process of digesting the hold of the second operating port 25b, if the jackpot is a probable jackpot, even if digesting the hold on the non-probability limited hold display design You wo n’t be able to win the jackpot. Therefore, the player can watch the process in which the hold of the second operating port 25b is digested while feeling tense, and can attract the player to the game. In addition, when winning in the probability variation jackpot, the displayed non-probability variation limited hold display symbol may be changed to a normal hold display symbol. In this way, it is possible to give the player a surprise as if the hold corresponding to the jackpot has suddenly changed, and enhance the interest of the game. Moreover, even if the jackpot is changed from being a big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player has a feeling of disappointment because the winning of the promising jackpot is an opportunity.

It should be noted that the non-probability limited hold display symbol may be displayed only when the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot. In such a case, if the non-probability limited hold display symbol is displayed during the non-probability change state, the player can recognize that the player can shift to the probability change state by digesting the hold.
Therefore, when the player wants to proceed with the game in a probable state, the player may play the game with the aim removed from the second operating port 25b in order to digest the suspension. On the other hand, if the non-probability limited hold display symbol is displayed in the probability change state, even if the player wins a jackpot other than the probability change jackpot and the probability change state ends, the player is sure to change the probability change state by digesting the hold. It can be recognized that it is possible to return to again. Therefore, it is only necessary to play a game aiming at entering the second operation port 25b so as not to digest the suspension until the game state shifts to the non-probability change state. Thereby, the player can enjoy the game while feeling the joy of playing the game while considering how to proceed with the game. In addition, as described above, there are advantages and disadvantages for the player depending on how the game proceeds, so that the player is guided to a game mode that is advantageous to the player by displaying the non-probable limited hold display design. Is also possible.

Alternatively, the non-probability limited hold display symbol may be displayed only when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot. In such a case, if the non-probability variation limited hold display symbol is displayed in the probability change state, the player can recognize that even if such a hold is consumed, the player will not win a win unless the transition is made to the non-probability change state. In such a case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the player desires to play a game in an uncertain change state, like the ball game machine 10 of the first modified example described above. That is, the player can not only play the jackpot game by digesting the hold related to the non-probability limited hold display symbol in the non-probability change state, but can continue the non-probability change state advantageous to himself after the big hit game. On the other hand, if you hold down the suspension in the probabilistic state, you won't even win a jackpot. As described above, there is a great difference for the player between digesting the hold after shifting to the non-probable change state and digesting the hold in the probability change state. For this reason, it will concentrate on the game which aims at the entrance to the 2nd operation port 25b, thinking that it will consume the hold | maintenance after shifting to a non-probable change state. This makes it possible to attract the player more strongly to the game.

Moreover, it is good also as what is displayed at the time of a non-probability change state instead of displaying the non-probability change reservation display symbol at the time of a probability change state. In such a case, if such a hold is digested, it is possible to win a jackpot, and after the jackpot game, it is possible to continue a non-probable change advantageous to the self.
Therefore, the player only needs to remove the aim from the second operating port 25b and play the game in order to digest the suspension. In this way, when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the configuration in which the non-probability limited hold display pattern is displayed adopts a configuration in which the player desires to play a game in a non-probable state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of playing a game while thinking about how to proceed with the game, and as a result, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

Although the ball ball game machine 10 and its modification examples of the present embodiment have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and modification examples, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the spirit thereof. Is possible.

For example, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, the probability variation state has been described as continuing until the next jackpot. However, the probability variation state may not be continued until the next jackpot, but may continue for a certain number of game times. . Alternatively, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift from a probability variation state to a non-probability variation state is triggered by entering the operation port 25, and the probability variation state is shifted from the probability variation state to the non-probability variation state according to the lottery result, or the probability variation state is continued. It is good to do. Further, the high support mode of the electric accessory 41 may be continued for a certain number of game times, or
It may be continued until a jackpot is generated. Furthermore, if the high support mode is started with the jackpot, the high support mode may not be executed after the next jackpot.

Inventions embodied in the above-described embodiments and modifications:
In general, in a ball ball game machine that plays a game by launching a game ball on the game board surface, when the game ball enters the entrance hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is performed with the entrance as a trigger. In such a lottery, the success / failure is determined based on the success / failure determination value acquired by the computer of the ball game machine,
As the lottery is executed, the symbol display on the symbol display device provided in the ball game machine is started. Then, after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure. If a game ball enters the entrance during the symbol variation display, the ball is stored as a hold, and after the symbol variation display is over, the hold is digested and a new variation display and lottery Done. By doing so, it is possible to perform a lottery even for the incoming balls generated during the display of the variation of the symbols.

In addition, in order to excite the fun of the game, the ball and ball game machine displays an effect image on an effect display device provided on the game board surface and outputs various sound effects, in addition to the variable display of symbols. Is also done. Such effects include the main control device that controls the progress of the entire game, such as detecting the entrance to the entrance and performing lottery when the entrance is made, and the control of the display contents of the effect display device and the output of sound effects This is realized by cooperating with a sub-control device that performs control related to the above. In other words, the main control device transmits the timing for starting the variable display of symbols according to the progress of the game, the variation time, etc. to the sub-control device, and the sub-control device receives this and displays the effect image on the effect display device. Or by outputting sound effects, it is possible to execute an effect that excites the game.

Among such ball game machines, there is also a type of ball game machine that obtains a determination value of success / failure when a hold occurs. With this type of ball game machine, it is possible to determine the success / failure at the time when the hold occurs, so when the hold occurs, the result of the determination is reflected in the effect to further improve the effect of the effect. A ball game machine has also been proposed. That is, the lottery is performed by the main control device, the effect mode is determined based on the result of the determination of the success / failure, and the determined effect mode is transmitted to the sub-control device to reflect the result of the determination of the success / failure in the effect of the effect display device. . For example, if different images are displayed on the effect display device depending on whether the result of the determination is successful or not, it is possible to make the player strongly expect the player to win, so the player's interest is strongly attracted to the game. It is considered possible. In addition, if the presentation mode is determined by taking into consideration not only the result of the success / failure determination but also various information related to the progress of the game, the player executes the presentation in a more appropriate mode according to the progress of the game. It is also possible to attract more interest.

However, when performing an effect based on such a hold, there is a problem that if the process of determining whether or not to perform an effect and the process of determining the aspect of the effect become complicated, there is a risk that the progress of the game may be hindered. In other words, since the main control device controls the progress of the entire game, if the processing for determining whether or not the performance can be performed and the mode of the performance become complicated, the processing load may increase and the progress of the game may be hindered. . For this reason, it is difficult to perform complicated processing when determining whether or not to execute the effect and the aspect of the effect, and as a result, even if trying to improve the interest of the game by reflecting the hold on the effect aspect, There was a limit.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems of conventional ball game machines, and even if the process of determining the production mode is complicated, there is a risk that the progress of the game may be hindered. The purpose is to provide a technology that can avoid the problem.

Ball game machine A1:
A ball game machine in which a game is played by launching a game ball in a game area where a game ball can be entered, and a lottery is performed when the game ball enters the game zone. There,
Numerical value storage means for storing numerical values;
Numerical value updating means for updating the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage means at a constant time period;
When a game ball enters the pitching unit, the determination result acquisition unit that acquires the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage unit as a determination result value for determining whether or not the lottery is successful;
A symbol display device capable of variably displaying symbols;
When a game ball enters the ball-entry unit in a state where the symbol is not variably displayed on the symbol display device, symbol variation display executing means for executing symbol variation display on the symbol display device;
A holding storage means for storing the determination value as a hold when a game ball enters the ball-entry unit during the display of variations in the symbol on the symbol display device;
An effect that is executed when an on-hold is stored, an effect mode determination process that determines whether or not the lottery is successful based on the determination value stored as the hold and determines an effect mode of the game based on the result of the determination An aspect determination processing execution means;
An effect execution means for acquiring the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination process and executing the effect in the effect mode;
The production mode determination process execution unit pauses the production mode determination process when the numerical value update period by the numerical value update unit approaches, and executes the remainder of the production mode determination process after the numerical value is updated. A ball game machine that is a means.

In such a ball game machine A1, the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage means is updated at a constant time period, and when a game ball enters the ball entering part, the numerical value in the numerical value storage means is used for the determination of whether or not the lottery is successful. Obtained as a judgment value. Further, when a game ball enters the ball-entry unit, the symbol display is started on the symbol display device. However, when the symbol variation is being displayed, the acquired determination value is stored as a hold. Further, when such a hold is stored, a lottery determination is performed based on the determination value stored as the hold, and a process of determining the effect mode based on the determination result (effect mode determination process) is executed. Here, when the update period of the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage means approaches, the process for determining the production mode is paused, the pause is canceled after the numerical value is updated, and the remaining processes are executed.

In this way, even if the process for determining the production mode is complicated and the process takes time, when the numerical value update period is reached, the process is suspended and the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage means is updated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a delay in updating the numerical value occurs. In general, when a numerical value is updated at a certain time period, and a numerical value is acquired when a game ball enters the pitching part and used as a lottery determination numerical value, if the timing for updating the numerical value is delayed, The probability that the numerical value is acquired at the time of entering the sphere increases as much as the update is delayed. as a result,
A normal lottery cannot be performed, and the game will be hindered. In this respect, if the process of determining the production mode is paused in this way, there is no possibility that the update timing of the numerical value will be delayed even if the production mode determination process takes time, so that the game will be hindered. The situation can be avoided. In addition, even in such a case, it is possible to determine the effect mode by executing the rest of the effect mode determination process after the numerical value is updated. Thereby, it is possible to reflect the result of the determination of success / failure in the effect mode when the hold is stored while avoiding a situation in which the game is disturbed.

In addition, in the ball game machine A1, “determining whether or not the lottery is successful based on the success / failure determination value stored as the hold and determining the game effect mode based on the determination result” It does not mean that the production mode is determined based only on the result, but the production mode may be determined based on various other information in addition to the determination result. For example, in a ball game machine capable of generating a so-called probability change state, in addition to the determination result, the effect mode may be determined in consideration of whether or not the probability change state. In the present invention, even if it takes a long time for the effect mode determination process, there is no possibility that the update timing of the numerical value will be delayed, so even in the case where other information is used in addition to the result of the determination as to whether or not this is the case. In addition, it is possible to reflect the result of the determination of whether or not the game is on hold in the effect while avoiding a situation where the game is disturbed.

  Moreover, in such a ball game machine A1, the following configuration may be adopted.

Ball game machine A2:
A ball game machine A1,
The holding storage means is means for storing the success / failure determination numerical value in a first storage area and a second storage area which is a storage area different from the first storage area,
The symbol variation display executing means is a means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner over a predetermined variation time, and, when the suspension is stored, digesting the suspension after the variation display and executing a new variation display. Yes,
Along with the on-hold digestion, the on-hold digestion time determination means for determining whether or not the lottery is successful based on the success / failure determination value stored as the on-hold,
The on-hold digestion time determination means is means for acquiring the determination value from the first storage area and determining whether or not the lottery is successful,
The effect mode determination process execution means is a ball game machine that is a means for executing the effect mode determination process for acquiring the success / failure determination numerical value from the second storage area and performing the lottery determination.

In such a ball game machine A2, after the change display of the symbol is performed over a predetermined change time,
The stored change is digested and a new change display is performed. At this time, the determination of whether or not the lottery is to be performed is performed on the basis of the determination result value stored as the suspension as the suspension is completed. here,
At the time of suspension, the determination result value is stored in the first storage area and the second storage area, and when the determination is made with the suspension, the determination result value is acquired from the first storage area. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination performed when the hold is stored, the success / failure determination numerical value is acquired from the second storage area.

In many ball game machines, control to change the progress of the game is often performed in response to the result of the determination of success / failure associated with the on-hold digestion. For example, if the determination of success / failure associated with the on-hold digestion is made and the determination result is a hit, control such as shifting the gaming state to a so-called jackpot gaming state or driving an accessory provided on the gaming board is performed. Do. For this reason, the result of the determination of success / failure accompanying the digestion of the hold has a property that influences the progress of the game. Therefore, the determination of success / failure accompanying the digestion of the hold is desirably performed as strictly as possible. For these reasons, it is important to reliably store the determination result value stored at the time of holding until the determination result, and from this point of view, the stored determination value is used. It is desirable to minimize the number of readings. Therefore, the first determination is made to read the success / failure determination value at the time of determination of success / failure accompanying the digestion of the hold.
In addition to the storage area, if the success / failure determination value is stored in a storage area (second storage area) different from the first storage area, the determination from the second storage area can be made at the time of determination of the success / failure to be performed during storage Since it is only necessary to read the success / failure determination numerical value, it is possible to suppress the number of times of reading the correct / failure determination numerical value from the first area that is referred to in the determination of the correctness / incorrectness associated with the suspension.

  Further, the following configuration may be adopted for the ball game machine A1.

Ball game machine A3:
A ball game machine A1,
Time elapsed determination means for determining whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the display of fluctuation of the symbol has reached a predetermined time;
When it is determined that the predetermined time has been reached by the time lapse determination means in a state where the hold is stored, whether or not the lottery is determined is determined based on a determination value stored as the hold. A suspension digesting means for digesting the suspension and executing a new variation display on the symbol display device,
When the suspension is stored, the effect mode determination process execution unit is a unit that executes the effect mode determination process after the time elapse determination is performed by the time elapse determination unit.

In such a ball game machine A3, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display. If the time has elapsed, the determination result value stored as the hold is used. On the basis of the determination as to whether or not it is correct, the suspension is used and a new change display is performed. Here, when the hold is stored, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, and then the effect mode determination process is executed.

In this way, if the time passage determination is prioritized over the production mode determination process, even if the production mode determination process requires time, the time passage determination is caused by the production mode determination process. There is no significant delay in execution. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of delays in the start of symbol variation display and the execution of the determination of success / failure associated with the suspension.

  In addition, such a ball game machine A3 can adopt the following configuration.

Ball game machine A4:
A ball game machine A3,
The holding storage means is means for storing the success / failure determination numerical value in a first storage area and a second storage area which is a storage area different from the first storage area,
The holding digest means is means for obtaining the success / failure determination numerical value from the first storage area and performing the determination of success / failure,
The effect mode determination process execution means is a bullet game machine which is means for executing the effect mode determination process for obtaining the success / failure determination numerical value from the second storage area and performing the determination of success / failure.

In such a ball game machine A4, the success / failure determination value is stored in the first storage area and the second storage area, and the determination is made from the first storage area when the determination of success / failure is made with the on-hold digestion. On the other hand, the determination value is acquired, and on the other hand, in the determination of whether or not the hold is stored, the determination value is acquired from the second storage area.

In this way, as described above, the number of times to refer to the storage area to be referred to in the determination of success / failure accompanying the digestion of the hold can be suppressed, so that the determination of success / failure accompanying the digestion of the hold can be performed more strictly. Become.

In addition, in the above-described ball game machine, in view of the point of determining the production mode based on the numerical value acquired at the time of occurrence of the hold, numerical values other than the success / failure determination value are acquired at the time of the occurrence of the hold, It is also possible to determine the production mode based on the above. From this, it is possible to grasp as the following ball game machine.

Ball game machine B1:
A ball game machine in which a game is played by launching a game ball in a game area where a game ball can be entered, and a lottery is performed when the game ball enters the game zone. There,
Numerical value storage means for storing numerical values;
Numerical value updating means for updating the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage means at a constant time period;
When a game ball enters the pitching unit, the determination result acquisition unit that acquires the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage unit as a determination result value for determining whether or not the lottery is successful;
Value acquisition means capable of acquiring different values depending on the acquisition timing;
A symbol display device capable of variably displaying symbols;
When a game ball enters the ball-entry unit in a state where the symbol is not variably displayed on the symbol display device, symbol variation display executing means for executing symbol variation display on the symbol display device;
When a game ball enters the entrance part while the symbol display device is displaying the variation of the symbol, the success / failure determination value is stored as a hold, and the value is acquired by the value acquisition means and the value is set as a hold value. Holding storage means for storing;
When the hold is stored, an effect mode determination process executing means for executing an effect mode determination process for determining an effect mode of the game based on the hold value stored together with the hold,
An effect execution means for acquiring the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination process and executing the effect in the effect mode;
The effect mode determination process execution means pauses the effect mode determination process when the numerical value update period is approaching, and executes the rest of the effect mode determination process after the numerical value is updated. Is a ball game machine.

In such a ball game machine B1, the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage means is updated at a constant time period, and when a game ball enters the ball entry part, the numerical value in the numerical value storage means is used to determine whether or not the lottery is successful. Obtained as a judgment value. Further, when a game ball enters the ball-entry unit, the symbol display is started on the symbol display device. However, when the symbol variation is being displayed, the acquired determination value is stored as a hold. In addition to storing the hold, the value acquired using a means for acquiring a different value depending on the acquisition timing is stored as the hold value. Further, when the hold is stored, a process for determining the effect mode (effect mode determination process) is executed based on the hold value. Here, when the update period of the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage means approaches, the process for determining the production mode is suspended, and the remaining processes are executed after the numerical value is updated.

In this way, even if the process for determining the production mode is complicated and the process takes time, when the numerical value update period is reached, the process is suspended and the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage means is updated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a delay in updating the numerical value occurs. As previously mentioned,
When a numerical value is updated at a certain time period, and a numerical value is acquired and used as a lottery determination numerical value when a game ball enters the pitching portion, if the timing for updating the numerical value is delayed, the pitching portion The probability that the numerical value is acquired upon entering the ball will increase by the amount of delay in updating. As a result, a normal lottery cannot be performed and the game is hindered. In this respect, if the process of determining the production mode is suspended, there is no possibility that the update timing of the numerical value will be delayed even if the production mode determination process takes time, so that a situation in which the game is hindered is avoided. It becomes possible. In addition, even in such a case, it is possible to determine the effect mode by restarting the effect mode determination process after the numerical value is updated. Thereby, it is possible to reflect the value acquired when the hold is stored in the effect mode from the occurrence of the hold, while avoiding a situation in which the game is disturbed.

Note that the value acquisition means of the ball ball game machine B1 may be any means as long as it is a means for acquiring a different value depending on the acquisition timing. For example, a random number generated using a so-called random number generator may be acquired, or a value may be acquired from a timer whose value changes with time. Even in such a case, it is possible to acquire different values depending on the acquisition timing.

In addition, in the ball and ball game machine B1, “determine a game effect mode based on the hold value”.
This does not mean that the effect mode is determined based only on the hold value, but the effect mode may be determined based on various other information in addition to the hold value. For example, in a ball game machine capable of generating a probability variation state, in addition to the hold value, the effect mode may be determined in consideration of the probability variation state. In the present invention, there is no possibility that the update timing of the numerical value will be delayed even if time is required for the production mode determination process. Therefore, even when other information is used in addition to the hold value in this way, It is possible to reflect the value acquired at the time of suspension in the effect while avoiding the situation where trouble occurs.

  Such a ball game machine B1 may adopt the following configuration.

Ball game machine B2:
A ball game machine B1,
The symbol variation display executing means is a means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner over a predetermined variation time, and, when the suspension is stored, digesting the suspension after the variation display and executing a new variation display. Yes,
A bullet ball game machine comprising a hold-in / out-time determination unit for determining whether or not to hold based on the hold value stored together with the hold.

In such a ball game machine B2, after the symbol variation display ends, the hold is consumed and a new variation display is started. Here, the determination of whether or not the lottery is based on the hold value stored together with the hold is executed along with the hold.

If a different value is acquired depending on the acquisition timing, if the value is acquired with the entrance to the entrance part, the value acquired is determined by the entrance timing to the entrance part. If it is determined whether or not the lottery is successful, it is possible to execute a lottery based on the entrance to the entrance part. Therefore, by storing the acquired value as a hold value and determining the production mode based on the hold value, it becomes possible to reflect the result of the lottery based on such a ball entry in the production mode from the occurrence of the hold. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the game. For example, when the value used for the lottery to determine whether or not the probability variation state is generated is stored as the hold value,
By determining the production mode based on the hold value, it is possible to execute the production in a mode different from normal when the probability variation state occurs. As a result, before the lottery is actually performed for the occurrence of the probability variation state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect it. Of course, the lottery is not limited to the lottery regarding the probability variation state, and may be other various lotteries. In such a case as well, the value used for the lottery is stored as the hold value, and the production mode is determined based on the hold value, so that the lottery result can be reflected in the production when the hold occurs, thereby attracting the player's interest. It becomes possible.

  Further, the above-described bullet ball game machine B1 may adopt the following configuration.

Ball game machine B3:
A ball game machine B1,
Time elapsed determination means for determining whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the display of fluctuation of the symbol has reached a predetermined time;
In the state where the hold is stored, if the time elapse determining means determines that the predetermined time has been reached, the hold for executing the lottery determination based on the hold value stored together with the hold A digestion success / failure determination means,
When the suspension is stored, the effect mode determination process execution unit is a unit that executes the effect mode determination process after the time elapse determination is performed by the time elapse determination unit.

In such a ball game machine B3, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the symbol variation display has reached a predetermined time. If the predetermined time has elapsed, it is stored together with the hold. Judgment is made based on the reserved value. Here, when the hold is stored, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, and then the effect mode determination process is executed.

As mentioned above, if the value is acquired at the entrance to the entrance, the value acquired is determined by the entrance timing to the entrance, so the lottery based on the entrance to the entrance is decided. It is possible to execute. And the acquired value is memorize | stored as a hold value, and it becomes possible to reflect the result of such a lottery in a production mode from the time of generation | occurrence | production of a hold by determining a production mode based on a hold value. Here, in the case where such a lottery determination is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of symbols, it is determined whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed before the effect mode determination process. For example, even if time is required for the production mode determination process, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the time determination is delayed due to that. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience that the determination of the passage of time is delayed while allowing the lottery result to be reflected in the effect mode.

Further, the above-described configuration may be adopted in the above-described bullet ball game machine B2 and the ball ball game machine B3.

Ball game machine B4:
A ball game machine B2 or a ball game machine B3,
The holding storage means is means for storing the holding value in a first storage area and a second storage area which is a storage area different from the first storage area,
The on-hold digestion time determination unit is a unit that acquires the hold value from the first storage area and makes a determination on the basis of the hold value.
The effect mode determination process execution means is a means for executing the effect mode determination process for acquiring the hold value from the second storage area and determining the effect mode of the game based on the hold value. Machine.

In such a ball game machine B4, the hold value is stored in the first storage area and the second storage area.
And when making a determination of success / failure with the digestion of the hold, the hold value is obtained from the first storage area, and when determining the production mode based on the hold value, the hold value is obtained from the second storage area. To get.

As described above, it is desirable that the value used for the lottery is stored in a reliable manner until the lottery is performed after the value is stored at the time of holding. It is preferable to keep it small. Therefore, a storage area (second storage area) different from the storage area (first storage area) that stores the lottery hold value is provided, and the second storage area is used when determining the production mode. If the hold value is acquired from the number of times, it is possible to reduce the number of times of accessing the lottery hold value.

10 ... ball game machine, 11 ... launch handle, 12 ... board surface,
13 ... Upper plate, 14 ... Speaker, 15 ... Front panel,
16 ... lower plate, 17 ... key, 20 ... game board,
21 ... Rail, 22 ... Nail, 23 ... Windmill,
24 ... Through operating port, 25a ... First operating port, 25b ... Second operating port,
26 ... Small prize opening, 28 ... Game area, 30 ... Production display device,
35 ... Director, 41 ... Electric character, 50 ... Out,
60 ... Large entrance, 70 ... Segment display,
72 ... Left display section, 74 ... Center display section, 76 ... Right display section,
80 ... Segment type display device for through, 100 ... Main control device,
102 ... MPU102, 110 ... ROM, 140 ... RAM,
160 ... Latest pending storage area, 200 ... Sub-control device, 240 ... Power supply device,
300 ... Display control device, 350 ... Director driving device,
400 ... game ball tank, 410 ... dispensing control device, 910 ... external output terminal

Claims (4)

A ball game machine in which a game is played by launching a game ball in a game area where a game ball can be entered, and a lottery is performed when the game ball enters the game zone. There,
Numerical value storage means for storing numerical values;
Numerical value updating means for updating the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage means at a constant time period;
When a game ball enters the pitching unit, the determination result acquisition unit that acquires the numerical value stored in the numerical value storage unit as a determination result value for determining whether or not the lottery is successful;
Value acquisition means capable of acquiring different values depending on the acquisition timing;
A symbol display device capable of variably displaying symbols;
When a game ball enters the ball-entry unit in a state where the symbol is not variably displayed on the symbol display device, symbol variation display executing means for executing symbol variation display on the symbol display device;
When a game ball enters the entrance part while the symbol display device is displaying the variation of the symbol, the success / failure determination value is stored as a hold, and the value is acquired by the value acquisition means and the value is set as a hold value. Holding storage means for storing;
When the hold is stored, an effect mode determination process executing means for executing an effect mode determination process for determining an effect mode of the game based on the hold value stored together with the hold,
An effect execution means for acquiring the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination process and executing the effect in the effect mode;
The effect mode determination process execution means pauses the effect mode determination process when the numerical value update period is approaching, and executes the rest of the effect mode determination process after the numerical value is updated. Is a ball game machine. The ball game machine according to claim 1,
The symbol variation display executing means is a means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner over a predetermined variation time, and, when the suspension is stored, digesting the suspension after the variation display and executing a new variation display. Yes,
A bullet ball game machine comprising a hold-in / out-time determination unit for determining whether or not to hold based on the hold value stored together with the hold. The ball game machine according to claim 1,
Time elapsed determination means for determining whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the display of fluctuation of the symbol has reached a predetermined time;
In the state where the hold is stored, if the time elapse determining means determines that the predetermined time has been reached, the hold for executing the lottery determination based on the hold value stored together with the hold A digestion success / failure determination means,
When the suspension is stored, the effect mode determination process execution unit is a unit that executes the effect mode determination process after the time elapse determination is performed by the time elapse determination unit. A ball game machine according to claim 2 or claim 3, wherein
The holding storage means is means for storing the holding value in a first storage area and a second storage area which is a storage area different from the first storage area,
The on-hold digestion time determination unit is a unit that acquires the hold value from the first storage area and makes a determination on the basis of the hold value.
The effect mode determination process execution means is a means for executing the effect mode determination process for acquiring the hold value from the second storage area and determining the effect mode of the game based on the hold value. Machine.

Images